JP6645539B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, an RTC (real-time clock) is provided in a gaming machine, and the same effect is executed at the same timing or the display mode is changed between a plurality of gaming machines based on time data measured by the RTC. Is known.

  In such a pachinko machine, the display mode is changed when the RTC reaches a preset time.

JP 2013-31695 A

  In this kind of pachinko machine, the effect is simply switched at a predetermined time, and once the player experiences the same effect, freshness is lost. Therefore, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from getting tired early.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides a lottery used for a lottery of a game, based on a ball entry opening in which a game ball can enter and a game ball entering the entrance. Lottery information obtaining means for obtaining information, storage means for storing the lottery information obtained by the lottery information obtaining means at least until a start condition is satisfied, and corresponding to the respective lottery information stored in the storage means A discriminating symbol display means for individually displaying discriminating symbols, a propriety determining means for performing a propriety determination based on establishment of the starting condition, and an identification symbol for indicating a propriety determination result by the propriety determining means. Symbol display means, a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification symbol, and the identification corresponding to the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. A dynamic display mode determining unit for determining a pattern dynamic display mode; and when the lottery information is stored in the storage unit, based on the stored lottery information before the start condition is satisfied. A prioritization determination unit for performing a determination of a hit or a failure, a discrimination symbol variable display unit that varies a display mode of the discrimination symbol in a display mode capable of identifying a determination result by the prioritization determination unit, A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on a certain condition; an operation means operable by the player; a timing means capable of timing; and a timing means thereof Time data discriminating means for discriminating time data according to the above, and when the time data discriminating means determines that the set value is a predetermined value, the time is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. A specific period in which the dynamic display mode different from the other periods is determined, and a production period setting means for setting at least a preparation period for starting the specific period, The preparation period is set as a longer period than the dynamic display period that can be determined by the dynamic display period determining unit, and the dynamic display mode that can be determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit includes: A specific dynamic display mode set with a high probability of being determined when the result of the determination by the determination unit is a hit is set, and the dynamic display mode determination unit is in the preparation period. If the state, and are not do not determine the specific dynamic display mode, based on said operation means is operated, selecting whether the particular time period is set by the presentation period setting means It is possible to choose .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , a lottery for acquiring lottery information used for a lottery of a game based on the entrance of a game ball where a game ball can enter and a game ball entering the entrance. Information acquisition means, storage means for storing the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means at least until a start condition is satisfied, and individual determination corresponding to each of the lottery information stored in the storage means Discriminating symbol display means for displaying a symbol, based on the establishment of the start condition, a propriety determining means for performing a propriety determination, and a symbol display means for displaying an identification symbol for indicating the result of the propriety determination by the propriety determining means Dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification symbol, and dynamic display of the identification symbol corresponding to the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means Aspect Dynamic display mode determining means for determining, and prior to executing the hit / fail judgment based on the stored lottery information before the start condition is satisfied when the lottery information is stored in the storage means. A game determining means for changing the display mode of the determination symbol in a display mode in which the determination result by the preliminary determination section is identifiable; and A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, an operation means operable by the player, a timekeeping means capable of timing, and a timing for determining timing data by the timing means. A data discriminating means, and when the timekeeping data discriminating means determines that the set value is a predetermined set value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit is changed to another one. A specific period in which the dynamic display mode different from the predetermined period is determined, and an effect period setting means for setting at least a preparation period for starting the specific period. The dynamic display mode is set in a period longer than the dynamic display period that can be determined by the dynamic display period determining unit. When the result is a hit, a specific dynamic display mode set with a high probability of being determined is set, and the dynamic display mode determining means determines the specific dynamic display mode when it is the preparation period. all SANYO not determine the dynamic display mode, based on said operation means is operated, the specific time period by the presentation period setting means capable of selecting whether the set Things. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the notice display mode per a long time. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an advance notice display for a long time, and (b) is a schematic view showing an example of an advance notice display of a change with respect to a pending ball that has won the second starting port during a long time. FIG. (A)-(b) is a figure which showed typically an example of the advance notice display of the fluctuation | variation with respect to the hold | maintenance ball which won the 2nd starting port during long time winning. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the advance notice display of the fluctuation | variation with respect to the hold | maintenance ball which won the 2nd starting port during a long time hit. (A) is an upper perspective view showing the positional relationship between the frame button and the touch switch of the pachinko machine, and (b) shows a display mode when the total number of fluctuations of the pachinko machine per day is displayed. It is the figure which showed an example, and (c) is the enlarged view which expanded and showed the changeover switch of the pachinko machine. (A) is a timing chart showing a period setting from power-on of the pachinko machine, (b) is an example showing a background image displayed in a preparation period of the pachinko machine, (c) is It is an example which showed the background image displayed in the time production period of the pachinko machine. (A)-(b) is a figure showing an example of an announcement effect display mode of a touch sensor displayed on a third symbol display device of a pachinko machine, and (c) is a third symbol display device of a pachinko machine. It is the figure shown about an example of the notice effect display mode displayed by. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a variation display mode of a variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device when the background mode A is selected, and (b) is a diagram showing the variation on the third symbol display device when the background mode B is selected. It is a figure showing an example of a change display mode of a change pattern displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a variation display mode of a variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device when the background mode A is selected, and (b) is a diagram showing the variation of the variation pattern when the background mode B is selected. It is a figure showing an example of a change display mode of a change pattern displayed. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a timing chart for each background mode when a variation pattern in which an addition time is set is selected. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an ordinary random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of a ROM in the main control device, and (c) is a schematic diagram. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of contents of a RAM in a main control device. It is the model which showed typically an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a figure showing a list of a fluctuation pattern command and an addition command outputted from a main control device of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table B which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a special pattern which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table B. It is the model which showed typically an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table A which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the special pattern 2 variation pattern selection table B which is a part of the variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a special diagram which is a part of the variation pattern selection table. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern selection table C. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a pending effect selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a pre-reading effect lottery table, and (c) to (d). () Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the prefetch effect selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a notice selection table A, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a notice selection table C. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a touch advance notice selection table, and (b) is a diagram listing the settings of a changeover switch. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table for notices. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows an electric accessory opening processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flow chart which showed time setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation pattern reception process performed by the MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flow chart which showed a change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the hold | maintenance effect selection process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control process. It is the flowchart which showed the suspended number transfer process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the holding ball number command reception process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the look-ahead effect selection process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous effect management processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the effect change process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the holding | maintenance number display update process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a sensor input process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a notice effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a mode switching process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 5 is a flowchart illustrating an addition command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the opening display mode of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a case where the pachinko machine of the second embodiment wins a normal symbol for a long period of time, and when the number of special symbols 2 reserved balls is 0 and a game ball is awarded at the second starting port, It is a timing chart showing an example until the special symbol 2 starts to change when the special symbol 1 is changing (the remaining change time is 3 seconds or more), and (b) is a pachinko machine in the second embodiment. 7 is a timing chart of a display mode showing an example of a state in which a special symbol 1 does not fluctuate when a game ball is won in a second starting port after a normal symbol has been won for a long time. It is the model which showed typically an example of the display data table of the general-purpose opening effect of a pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the general-purpose opening process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM in the main control device of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment, and (b) is a main control device of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of a RAM in (a), and (c) is a normal variation pattern selection table A (mode 1) which is a part of the variation pattern selection table of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. FIG. 9D is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the normal variation pattern selection table B (mode 2) which is a part of the variation pattern selection table of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change start process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (A) is a timing timing chart showing an example of a case in which the change stop timing of the special symbol notified by the rainbow color reserved symbol of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment is a preparation period, and (b) is a timing timing chart. It is the timing chart which showed an example when the fluctuation | variation period of the special symbol alert | reported by the rainbow color reserved symbol of the pachinko machine 10 in 4th Embodiment extends from a preparation period to a time production period. It is the model which showed typically some contents of RAM of the audio ramp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice selection process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception processing 3 performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the opening process performed by MPU in the audio ramp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous effect management processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the effect change process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern selection table which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table of a pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed as an example the list of the fluctuation | variation pattern command and the addition command output from the main control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the display control device of the pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of a pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation pattern command process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of a pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed addition command processing 2 performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of an RTC connected to an audio ramp control device of a pachinko machine according to a sixth embodiment. (B) is a conceptual diagram of a structure in which a setting switch of a pachinko machine according to a sixth embodiment is operated by a switching motor. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 6th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the notice of the school of fish charge which uses the touch sensor and board side touch sensor of a pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is a mimetic diagram showing typically a display mode of a card notice which is a notice effect using a frame side touch sensor 290 and a board side touch sensor of a pachinko machine in the seventh embodiment. is there. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically some contents of RAM in the audio ramp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the seventh embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the sensor input process 2 performed by MPU in the audio ramp control device of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the sensor effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the sensor selection process performed by MPU in the audio ramp control device of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special operation process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the seventh embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 15) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. On the upper surface of the upper plate 17, a frame button 22 and a touch sensor 290 are provided.

  The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the background mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or changing the content of the notice effect. You. In addition, the touch sensor 290 displays, for example, the display content of the special effect using the touch sensor 290 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later based on the operation of the touch sensor 290 by the player. Be changed. Further, the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 may be configured to be used as, for example, switches for driving a driving accessory provided in the gaming machine. The frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 9A. However, the touch switch 290 is disposed closer to the front side of the gaming machine than the frame button 22. Normally, when the player presses (operates) the frame button 22, the touch switches are respectively arranged at positions where the touch switch can respond to the player's hand.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, A starting port 64a, a second starting port 64b, an electric accessory 64c, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled. The general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed with wood screws from the front side. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 15) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol 1 (first symbol) is drawn when a ball enters the first starting port 64a, and a special symbol 2 (when the ball enters the second starting port 64b). A lottery of the first symbol is performed, and when the ball passes through the through gate 67, a lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of a special symbol 1 or a special symbol 2 (hereinafter, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is referred to as a special symbol) performed for a ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, Whether or not the symbol is a jackpot is determined, and if it is determined that the symbol is a special symbol, the jackpot type is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls are won). ) Release and the release is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of jackpot types for special symbols: "jackpot A" and "jackpot B". After the special game state ends, as a value added after the end of the jackpot, a game corresponding to these jackpot types is performed. (Game value) is given to the player.

  Further, when a special symbol 1 (first symbol) or a special symbol 2 (first symbol) is selected, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display a special symbol in a variable manner, and a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds). After 30 seconds have elapsed, the special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first starting port 64a while the special symbol is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is retained up to four times, and the number of retained balls is set to the first number. This is shown by the symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, when a ball enters the second starting port 64b while the special symbol is changing, the number of entered balls is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the retained ball number is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. In both cases, the third symbol display device 81 is also shown. In addition, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in an identifiable display mode. As will be described in detail later, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to make it easier for the player to identify the number of retained balls, the special symbol variation display mode, the determination result, and the like than the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the normal player plays the game while watching the display mode of the third symbol display device 81.

  When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. Is started. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 64b is given priority over the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 64a, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed. Then, the variable display according to the lottery is started. Therefore, the lottery for the reserved ball at the first starting port 64a is executed when there is no reserved ball at the second starting port 64b. While the change of the special symbol 2 is being executed, the change of the special symbol 1 is not executed. In other words, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are configured so that there is no period in which the special symbol 1 fluctuates at the same time.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 do not change at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. With this configuration, the lottery of more games is executed in a short time, and the determination result can be displayed, so that the game can be played more efficiently.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the second starting port 64b has an open state in which the game ball can be guided to the entrance on both sides of the entrance where the game ball enters, and the entrance to the entrance. And a powered member 64c having a blade member rotatable between a closed state and a closed state that regulates The electric accessory 64c is operated from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined time based on winning (winning) of a normal symbol (second symbol) described later. Also, at normal times, the game ball is held upright so as to prevent the ball from entering from both sides of the ball entrance, so as to prevent the game ball from entering between the wing members. , A first starting port 64a. Therefore, the second starting port 64b is normally configured to be able to enter the ball only when the electric accessory 64c operates in the open state. Therefore, normally, it is configured such that a game ball can easily enter the first starting port 64a, and the player fires a game ball to enter the first starting port 64a and plays a game. It will be.

  The special winning opening 65a which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the second starting opening 64b. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first starting opening 64a. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first starting port 64a becomes maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate 67, a determination is made as to whether or not the symbol has been hit. In the case of the normal symbol, two types are set: a normal hit and a long hit in which the opening time and the number of times of opening increase respectively, as compared with the normal hit. When the normal symbol hits or hits for a long time, the electric accessory associated with the second starting port 64b is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 0.2 seconds or 2 seconds), and the second starting port 64b is opened. The ball becomes easy to enter. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the second starting port 64b, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the through gate 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. At the same time, it is shown also in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the drawing is started. You.

  As described above, as the jackpot types of the special symbols, two types of “jackpot A” and “jackpot B” are provided. In the case of "big hit A" and "big hit B", both of them are in the special game state of 16 rounds (16R big hit). Thereafter, in the case of "big hit A", as a value added after the big hit, the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol from the end of the big hit until the jackpot game of the next special symbol starts. Shift to special symbols). On the other hand, in the case of "big hit B", the probability of winning a normal symbol increases from the end of the big hit until the lottery of the special symbol ends 100 times. Note that, even in the high probability state, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is similarly set up.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (special symbol is being changed). In other words, the special game state (16R jackpot) ) Is a game state that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where the special symbol is not in the high probability state is referred to as the special symbol low probability state, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol jackpot probability is in the normal state. (Normal state of special symbol or low probability game state). The “normal symbol time reduction state” (medium symbol time reduction medium or time reduction game state) is a game state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases and a ball easily enters the second starting port 64b. Say. On the other hand, when it is not the "normal symbol time reduction state", it is called "normal symbol normal state" (normal game state), which means that the normal symbol hit probability is the normal state, that is, the hit probability is lower than during time reduction. Indicates that. Hereinafter, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a special symbol probable change period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type becomes “jackpot A”, the period from the end of the “jackpot A” to the start of the next jackpot is set as the probable change period. Or a 100-times special symbol lottery may be set as the probable change period. In addition, both the “big hit A” and the “big hit B” may be configured to be set to a predetermined number of times and a certain change period. In addition, the probable change period may naturally be a probable change period for a predetermined time (2 minutes, 5 minutes, or the like).

  In the pachinko machine 10, when an initial setting is performed by turning on a power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “low probability state of special symbol”. Thereafter, when the special symbol hits, the state shifts to the “special symbol high probability state” and to the “normal symbol time reduction state”.

  In addition, while the "special symbol high probability state" is continued, a special symbol jackpot is newly obtained, and if the jackpot type is "big hit A", the "special symbol high probability state" further includes It continues from the end of the new special symbol jackpot until the start of the next jackpot game.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether or not a lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 which is performed in accordance with the ball (start winning) in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is being executed. By displaying, a special symbol 1 (the first symbol) or a special symbol 2 (the first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state as a stop symbol after the change, The number of retained balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, are respectively indicated by lighting states.

  While the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is being fluctuated on the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. When a ball is hit, the number of times of ball entry is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81, respectively. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four times. Instead, the number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of the special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change. A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to B) is shown.

  In the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, separate dedicated LEDs 37a are assigned for displaying the symbol and for displaying the number of reserved balls, respectively. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to distinguish between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 so that the player can distinguish between them.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (starting prize), the special symbol (the first symbol) corresponding to the starting port entered on the first symbol display device 37 is used as a trigger. Symbol) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of main symbols of numbers from “0” to “9”. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 15) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of odd numbers "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" are stopped and displayed together. In the case of "big hit B", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are aligned.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower portions, and the upper 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The lower one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. The approximate center of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of retained balls that is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first starting port 64a, and the small area Ds2 is Is a region for displaying a notice effect image, and the small region Ds3 is a region for displaying the number of retained balls that is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the second starting port 64b. It is.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbols displayed at the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbols are displayed so as to be visible, so that a maximum of nine main symbols are displayed in total. In some cases. In the sub-display area Ds, a door, a character, a character, and the like are displayed in the central small area Ds2, and it is suggested to the player that the state easily transitions to a bigger hit than usual, and that a normal symbol hit is made. . In addition, by displaying the main symbol displayed on the activated line L1 with reduced transparency and displaying the main symbol displayed on the other lines with increased transparency, the player can recognize the activated line more easily. it can.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 4B, in the sub-display area Ds, a display mode of a holding ball based on entering the first starting port 64a displayed in the left small area Ds1, and a right small area Ds3 Is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the reserved ball of the second starting port 64b displayed for easy identification. More specifically, one “」 ”is displayed for one reserved ball of the first starting port 64a, and if there are two reserved balls, two“ ○ ”are displayed side by side. You. Similarly, “○” is displayed side by side in accordance with the number of reserved balls. On the other hand, with respect to the reserved ball in the second starting port 64b, "△" is displayed for one reserved ball other than the retained ball that has entered for a long time in the normal design. In the case where the ball enters the second starting port 64b during a long time of the ordinary symbol, one “★” is displayed for one reserved ball as shown in FIG. 6A.

  Thereby, the reserved balls of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, that is, the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be easily displayed. In addition, since the display mode of the retained ball entering the second starting port 64b is displayed differently depending on the hit type of the ordinary symbol, the player can easily determine that the retained ball has been generated for a long time. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 include, in addition to the above-mentioned main symbol, reserved symbol, etc., a character display, a notice effect display such as a character, and a total effect display. The display of the number of changes is appropriately displayed. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the ball which entered into the 1st starting port 64a was constituted so that it may be held up to four times, the maximum number of holding balls is not limited to four times, but three times or less. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds3, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of retained balls. The display may be performed in a different manner (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) depending on the amount. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8, in the third symbol display device 81, the notification display mode for a long time of a normal symbol and the normal symbol for a long time are entered into the second starting port 64 b. A description will be given of a notice display mode executed for a held ball that has been hit. First, FIG. 5A is a diagram showing a display mode in which it is announced that the opening of the electric accessory 64c will be executed due to a long hit of a normal symbol. Here, the lottery result of the changing ordinary symbol is determined, and when the lottery result is a long time, the small symbol is displayed in the small display area Ds2 in FIG. 5B three seconds before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. The door of the door symbol to be slid slides in the opening direction (the left-right direction of the display area), and as shown in FIG.

  After that, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and in synchronization with the timing when the electric accessory 64c is opened, the electric accessory of the winning opening displayed in the small area Ds2 is operated as shown in FIG. The open symbol is displayed, and the player is notified that the electric accessory 64c is open. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, when the display that the door symbol of the small area Ds2 is opened is displayed, a dolphin symbol is displayed on the upper left of the small area Ds3.

The dolphin symbol displays the word "opening" in a balloon in accordance with the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c (ordinary symbol stop display timing) to notify that the electric accessory 64c is open. Is done. As described above, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a long time different from the normal hit, the third symbol display device 81 is notified in advance before the stop symbol is displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the opportunity to open the electric accessory 64c.
Here, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 is the maximum number of four, and the special symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a fluctuating display with a long fluctuating time such as a reach, the player is required to set the special symbol 1 on the ball. Even if a game ball is fired and a ball enters the first starting port 64a, the ball becomes an invalid ball that does not become a reserved ball. Therefore, the launch of the game ball is stopped and the reserved ball is digested. There are many cases where a player waits for a game. In such a case, even if the normal symbol is won for a long time and the electric accessory 64c is opened for a long time and the ball is started to be fired, the game is transferred to the second starting port 64b. It is difficult to make the ball enter the second starting port 64b by effectively using the opening time of the electric accessory 64c.

  However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, it is notified in advance that the electric accessory 64c will be in the open state a predetermined time before the electric accessory 64c is opened for a long time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds before). The player can play the game while preventing a chance to let the ball enter the second starting port 64b.

  Next, FIG. 6 (a) shows a special case in which a ball enters the second starting port 64b when the electric accessory 64c is operated in the open state based on the normal pattern long hit. It is a display mode showing a state where four reserved balls are set in symbol 2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the holding pattern of the holding ball formed by entering the second starting port 64b in the open state of the electric accessory 64c for a long time is represented by " ★ ”is displayed. When there are four reserved balls, four “★” are displayed side by side as shown in FIG.

  Next, in FIG. 6B, the electric accessory 64 c shifts from the open state to the closed state, and a lottery is executed for one of the reserved balls for the special symbol 2, and the variation display of the special symbol 2 starts. It is a figure showing the state where it was done. The dolphin displayed in the small area Ds3 displays a notice by a balloon at the start of the fluctuation each time for the retained ball formed by entering the electric accessory 64c by hitting the symbol for a long time. In FIG. 6A, when one of the four reserved balls starts to change, “?” Is displayed by a balloon. This "?" Is not included in the lottery that starts to fluctuate, and is not included (all missed) than the case where the winning determination result is a hit in the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is included. (See below with reference to FIG. 24 (a) for details) to inform that the probability of hitting the player is low.

  Next, FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating a display mode in a case where one more reserve ball is digested from the state of FIG. 6B and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is started. In FIG. 7 (a), at the start of the change of the special symbol 2, the character "chance?" Is displayed to notify the player of the advance notice relating to the result of the determination of the success or failure. The notice display of “chance?” Is set to be easier to select when the result of the hit / fail judgment (including the result of the fluctuation start, the result of the hit / fail judgment of the reserved ball of the special symbol 2) is out of the case of winning. Thus, the player can predict the result of the determination in advance.

  Next, FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a state in which one reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is further digested from the reserved number of FIG. 7A and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is started. FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a case where the dolphin gives a notice of “Chance!” In a balloon at the start of the variable display of the special symbol 2. The notice display of "chance !!" is set to be easier to select when the hit / fail judgment result (including the result of the change start, the hit / fail judgment result of the reserved ball of the special symbol 2) is a hit than in the case of the loss. (See FIG. 24A). This allows the player to predict the result of the determination in advance.

  Next, FIG. 8 shows a case where the reserved ball of one special symbol 2 is further digested from the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 shown in FIG. 7B, and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is started. It is a figure showing the display mode of. In FIG. 8, at the start of the change of the special symbol 2, the character “Large Chance !!” is displayed to notify the player of a preview display relating to the result of determining whether or not the special symbol 2 is changing. The notice of "Large Chance !!" is set to be easier to select when the result of the determination as to whether or not the special symbol 2 is changing is a hit than when it is out (see FIG. 24A). . Thus, the player can play the game expecting that the result of determining whether or not the special symbol 2 is changing is a big hit.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 is always reach when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is zero. Is selected irrespective of the result of the determination. That is, when the electric accessory 64c is in an open state based on the normal pattern hitting for a long time, a plurality of balls enter the second starting port 64b, and thereafter, when the variation starts sequentially, all the entering balls Even if the lottery result of the lost ball is out of order, the variation pattern to be the reach is always selected in the variation display of the last reserved ball.

  In addition, in the case of a change in the retained ball caused by the ball being thrown into the second starting port 64b by the operation of the electric accessory 64c due to a long time hit, the advance notice related to the result of the determination of success or failure is displayed continuously every time at the start of the change. Configured. Furthermore, as the number of consecutive times increases, a notice display that expects the success / failure determination result to be a large hit is configured to be easily selected, so that the player usually hits the symbol for a long time, The lottery executed when the ball is thrown into the second starting port 64b can be made to feel more likely to be a big hit than the lottery executed when the first starting port 64a is won at normal times. In addition, in the case of the special design 2 holding ball that is generated over a long period of time, in the last change (a lottery executed when the number of the special design 2 holding balls is 0), a change pattern that becomes a reach is always selected. Therefore, even if the lottery result is out of order, the player's expectation of the jackpot can be increased. Therefore, the player can expect the special symbol 2 to be displayed as a special variable display triggered by a long hit, and can play the game with more expectation that the normal symbol will be a long hit. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5B, at the timing when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol indicating a long time hit, the notice of the dolphin displayed in the small area Ds3 is displayed as “ The word "opening" is displayed, but the invention is not limited to this, and the normal symbol is stopped by the time when the player fires the game ball and the game ball reaches the second starting port 64b, which is earlier than the time required. You may comprise so that it may be displayed before it is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to make the second starting port 64b win a game ball by effectively utilizing a longer hit.

  Further, the notification may be made about two seconds earlier than the time when the game ball arrives. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is advantageous to the player while protecting the profit of the game store.

  Next, the positional relationship between the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 22 will be described with reference to FIG. The touch sensor 290 is provided in front of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. The touch sensor 290 has a built-in reflection-type photo sensor inside, and has a cover member made of a transparent black resin member attached to an output unit for outputting an LED of the photo sensor, It is arranged on the surface of the pachinko machine 10. The touch sensor 290 allows the player to bring his hand or the like close to the output unit of the photosensor until a predetermined interval and blocks the light of the LED, whereby the light of the LED is reflected and input to the input unit of the photosensor. This is the configuration for detecting. The photo sensor 290 is electrically connected to the input / output port of the audio lamp control device 113, and is configured so that the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can determine whether the touch sensor 290 is on. I have. The touch sensor 290 is an operation means that can be operated by a player to change the effect content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the frame button 22.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, an effect of changing the indicator by keeping the touch sensor 290 detected by the player is executed. The effect is to inform the player that the bigger the indicator can be changed to a larger scale, the higher the possibility that the jackpot will be given to the player.

  Further, since the touch sensor 290 is provided on the player side of the frame button 22, even when the player presses the frame button 22, the touch sensor 290 can detect and easily turn on. . Therefore, even when the frame button 22 is pressed, the touch sensor 290 can be turned on.

  Next, FIG. 9 (b) shows the total number of changes since the power was turned on when the standby screen (demo screen) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the third symbol display device. It is a display example in the case where it was displayed on 81. In this way, the player can check how much the game is being played.

  Next, FIG. 9C is a diagram showing a setting switch 291 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 3). The setting switch 291 is provided below the RAM erasing switch 122 and is exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9C, the setting switch 291 is configured by a dip-type changeover switch. The input is switched by rotating, and switching from setting “1” to setting “4” is possible. A display window for setting confirmation is provided on the external cover so that the setting value can be confirmed, and the setting value can be visually recognized from the display window by rotating the setting switch 291. The setting switch 291 is electrically connected so that a setting signal is input to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 as shown in FIG. Each setting is arranged so as to be switched when rotated every 90 degrees, and provided with a lock mechanism that is lightly locked so that when rotated to each set value, it is difficult to rotate from other areas. .

  FIG. 26B shows the control contents set by each setting of the changeover switch 291. When the setting is 1, the effect using the RTC 292 is set to be effective, and the display of the total number of changes shown in FIG. 9B is set to be effective. Similarly, the setting 2 is set so that the display of the RTC 292 is invalid and the total number of fluctuations is displayed, the setting 3 is set such that the RTC 292 is valid and the total fluctuation number is not displayed, and the setting 4 is that the RTC 292 is invalid. , The display of the total number of changes is set to non-display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the time effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 10A is a timing chart showing a period in which a time effect is executed from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to when the power is turned off in the second embodiment. In the present embodiment, an RTC (real-time clock) 292 for time measurement, which will be described later, is provided in the audio lamp control device 113, so that the time since the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on can be measured. Have been.

  When 54 minutes (period A in FIG. 10A) have elapsed since the power was turned on, a preparation period (period B in FIG. 10A) for executing the time effect for one minute is set thereafter. Thereafter, a time effect period (time period C in FIG. 10A) in which the time effect is executed is set. Here, when the preparation period is set, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), a background image in which the character "Soon to start the super fish school time" is set, and the time effect is immediately started for the player. Notification indicating that the information is to be executed. Further, the fluctuation time of the special symbol selected in the normal game state (low probability game state) is 30 seconds at the maximum as shown in FIGS. 18 and 22, and the fluctuation pattern executed before the preparation period ends. It is configured to

  Although details will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 22 (a), the fluctuation pattern that starts to fluctuate during the preparation period is not set to “Super Reach”. The display mode is not displayed. In the time production period, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the special fish school that informs that the big hit is confirmed is configured to be displayed more easily than usual, and the super reach and the notice display are displayed during the preparation period. By configuring so as not to be displayed, it is possible to enhance the freshness of the notice display during the time production period.

  After one minute, which is the preparation period, the background image displaying the character “during super fish school time” indicating that the time production period is in progress is displayed in the third symbol display as shown in FIG. It is displayed on the device 81. In the background image of the time effect period, an image in which a plurality of small fish swim is displayed, and a different impression from the normal time can be given to the player. Then, when the time production period of 5 minutes elapses, the background image is changed to a normal background image (a background image corresponding to the mode selected before the preparation period), and a lottery of a special symbol is continuously performed. Is done. Thereafter, when 54 minutes have elapsed, the preparation period is set again, and thereafter, the time effect period is set. In this way, it is repeatedly executed at the same time interval.

  If the jackpot game is started before the preparation period or the jackpot game is started during the preparation period, after the jackpot game ends, a period corresponding to the time at that time (period A to C) Is set. In this period, for example, the big hit game is started in the preparation period, and if the end of the big hit game is one minute remaining in the time effect period, a one-minute time effect is executed.

  With this configuration, the power cable is connected to the power supply outlet of the hall while the power switch (not shown) of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The other pachinko machine 10 of the same kind is connected to the power supply outlet in the same manner. By providing a switch such as a breaker capable of switching whether or not to supply electricity to the power supply outlet, power can be turned on to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same time.

  Therefore, by simultaneously turning on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the present embodiment, the timing at which the time effect is executed can be adjusted by the plurality of pachinko machines 10. In addition, in the present embodiment, before the time effect period is set, the preparation period is set to be longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special symbol. Can be combined.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the preparation period and the time effect period are executed is set as described above, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. In addition, when the predetermined time has elapsed, a lottery is performed for each pachinko machine 10 to determine whether or not to perform the time effect, and only the pachinko machine 10 that wins the lottery performs the time effect. May be. Further, it may be configured such that the player can select whether or not to execute the time effect by operating the frame button 22 or the like at the timing when the time effect is executed, during standby, or the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a description will be given of a notice effect display using the touch sensor 290. FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a state in which a notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the special symbol is changing. When the notice effect display is determined and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is reduced to the upper right side of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, an indicator is displayed in the preview effect display using the touch sensor 290, as shown in FIG. Before the reaction (detection) of the touch sensor 290, the indicator is displayed on a scale “0”, and the “charge with the touch sensor” indicating to the player that the scale of the indicator is raised (charged) by reacting the touch sensor 290. !! "is displayed. Then, the player puts his hand on the touch sensor 290 (touches the touch sensor 290) to turn on the touch sensor 290 (a state in which the touch sensor 290 is reacted), so that the scale of the indicator is raised. I have. FIG. 11A shows a state where the indicator has risen to the scale “1”. FIG. 11B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the indicator is raised to the scale “2”.

  In the present embodiment, although the details will be described later, the change of the indicator that operates based on the touch sensor 290 being turned on is determined in advance by lottery. The lottery of the indicator is executed based on the result of determining whether or not the special symbol starts to fluctuate, the fluctuation pattern, and the value of the effect count t 223k. When the result of the hit determination is a hit, a larger scale is set more easily than in the case of a departure. Also, when the selected fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of “super reach”, a scale larger than that of the case of “normal reach” is easily selected. In the present embodiment, the announcement effect display using the touch sensor 290 is not selected when the variation pattern does not reach the “short time departure” or “long time departure”.

  With such a configuration, when the notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is displayed at the start of the change of the special symbol, the player identifies that the change that has started the change display is the reach display mode, Next, by operating the photo sensor 290, it is possible to play a game while looking forward to how far the scale of the indicator is raised. When the scale of the indicator is raised to a large scale, the player can increase a sense of expectation for a big hit and can enjoy a game more.

  FIG. 11C shows the lower right (small area Ds3) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 10 times) during the special symbol change display. , A notice effect display (special notice display) imitating a placard is displayed. As described above, by displaying the notice effect display based on the specific operation of the player, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored during the game. This advance notice display is an advance notice display set in the processing of S1913 of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (FIG. 59, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  With reference to FIGS. 12 and 13, an example of a variable display mode of the background mode A and the background mode B displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 12A is a diagram showing a state in which the reach display mode is set when the super reach change pattern is selected and the background mode A is selected. FIG. 12B shows a display mode on the third symbol display device 81 when the same variation pattern as that of FIG. 12A is selected and the background mode B is selected at the same timing. FIG. As described above, even when the same fluctuation pattern is selected, the displayed content is different due to the selected background mode being different, and further, the timing of displaying in the reach display mode is different. . In the background mode B shown in FIG. 12B, a pseudo symbol configured in the same manner as the main symbol is stopped and displayed, and the actual main symbol is reduced to the lower right of the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed fluctuating. With this configuration, in the background mode B, it is possible to recognize that the display is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the departure. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 13A, in the background mode A, an effect display indicating whether or not to develop into special reach is executed. On the other hand, in the background mode B, as shown in FIG. 13B, the pseudo symbol imitating the main symbol starts to change again and is displayed in a variable manner, and the actual main symbol is shifted to the right as shown in FIG. It is reduced and displayed at the bottom.

  Next, FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the variable display mode in each of the background modes shown in FIGS. 12 to 13 described above. In accordance with the background mode selected by the player with the frame button 22, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started based on the fluctuation start timing. Whether the background mode A is selected or the background mode B is selected, the timing of the start of the change is the same.

  In the present embodiment, although the details will be described later, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines a variation pattern (variation time) from the variation pattern selection table, and determines the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection table. In addition to the type, a variation pattern command indicating a fixed time and an addition command indicating an addition time in which a time defined in the variation pattern is added are output to the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the command output from main controller 110 to determine the variation pattern is composed of the addition of the variation pattern command and the addition command indicating the addition time. It should be noted that, when the fixed time indicated by the fluctuation pattern and the addition time are summed, the fluctuation time is determined by lottery. The MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can select an effect with a high degree of freedom by using the addition command.

  As shown in FIG. 14, after the start of the fluctuation, a fluctuation display set for a fixed time is executed. In the case of this example, the fixed time is set to 8000 ms, and is constituted by the same time as the fluctuation time that deviates for a short time. Therefore, based on the fixed time, the sound lamp control device 113 makes a change to the display control device 114 in the background mode A in the same manner as the short-time departure, and then changes the left symbol sequence Z1 and the right symbol sequence. The stop display is performed in the reach display mode in which Z3 and the same symbol are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 12A). On the other hand, in the case of the background mode B, after the same fluctuation display as the short-time departure, a pseudo-symbol similar to the main symbol is displayed, and a stop symbol indicating the departure is displayed in the pseudo-symbol, and the actual main detent is displayed. The symbol is reduced and displayed in the small area Ds3 (see FIG. 12B). The SW valid period, which is a period during which the background mode can be changed, is also set to 4000 ms in the same manner as the short-time departure.

  The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 indicates that the addition command received from the main control device 110 when the SW valid period has elapsed and the period in which the background mode cannot be changed by the player has been triggered. Based on the added time, based on the selected background mode, an effect after a fixed time has elapsed is determined, and a display command is output to the display control device 114. In the example shown in FIG. 79, in the background mode A, after a fixed time has elapsed, an effect for notifying the player of whether or not to develop into the super reach shown in FIG. 13A is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the background mode B is selected, the pseudo symbol starts to fluctuate after the fixed time has elapsed, and the fluctuating display similar to the short-time departure is executed. The actual main symbol is continuously displayed at a high speed while being reduced to the small area Ds3. After that, while the display is fluctuating again with the same fluctuation display (fluctuating time) as the short-time departure, specifically, during the high-speed fluctuation, the pseudo symbol is replaced with the actual main symbol, and the main symbol is changed. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the reach display. Thereafter, the background mode A and the background mode B execute the same super reach display mode at the same timing.

  As described above, in a configuration in which the player can select a plurality of background modes in a single variation display of the special symbol and enjoy different variation displays, a plurality of effects are respectively reproduced and processed, and the background is displayed. In the configuration in which the switching is performed by changing the mode or the reproduction process is executed from the timing based on the switching of the background mode, a problem occurs in that the control load of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 increases. . However, as in the present embodiment, by composing a command indicating a fixed time and a command indicating an addition time as a command for selecting a variation pattern, a similar special symbol is generated based on the command indicating a fixed time. Is controlled to execute the variation display (only the variation display and background at the time of elapse), and when the period in which the background mode can be changed has elapsed, the effect is determined based on the command indicating the addition time, Only the control process for determining one effect is required, and the control load can be reduced. In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 does not need to calculate the remaining fluctuation time and determine the effect or the like, so that the load required for control can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variation by displaying, by lighting, whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, is stopped, and the stop after the variation is completed. As the symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the ball passes through the through gate 67, a variable display in which a symbol of “○” and a symbol of “X” as the second symbol are alternately lit is displayed. Done. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 operates the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting port 64b for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, the ball easily enters the second starting port 64b. The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit by the second symbol retaining lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the plurality of lamps on and off in the second symbol display device 83, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and three or less or five or more balls pass through the through gate 67, similarly to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. (For example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first starting port 64a and a second starting port 64b into which a ball can enter are provided. When a ball enters the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, a first entrance switch and a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on. When the first entrance switch and the second entrance switch are turned on, the main controller 110 draws a special symbol 1 and a special symbol 2, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. LED 37a. Further, the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls when entering the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b is the same, but is not limited thereto, and may be different. For example, when entering the first starting port 64a, the number of prize balls for the second starting port 64b is determined as three prize balls, and for entering the second starting port 64b as four prize balls. The number may be set to be larger than the number of prize balls for one starting port 64a. With such a configuration, more prize balls can be given to the player when the normal symbol is hit for a long time, and the value of the normal symbol per long time can be further increased. Therefore, the player can expect a game other than the jackpot of the special symbol, and can prevent the player from getting tired of the game. Further, the player can obtain more prize balls during the working hours or during the probable change period, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player's possessed ball decreases extremely during the working hours or during the probable change period.

  On the other hand, when the prize balls of the second start port 64b are set to be smaller than those of the first start port 64a, it is possible to design so that more game balls enter the second start port 64b during the probable change period or during the working hours. Thus, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 can be maintained at a larger number, and an efficient game can be played. Therefore, the game time of the probable change period can be shortened during the working hours, and the sales of the game store can be increased.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the second starting opening 64b, and a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a 16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 15). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 15). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  The special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed in order to select a special random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and a special symbol big hit type. A special hit type counter C2 to be used, an initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the special hit random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS1 used to select a change pattern are used. In addition, a random number counter C4 is used for lottery of ordinary symbols, and an initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting an initial value of the random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 42). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a composed of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing the special symbol 1 reserved ball, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. A special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b including four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) is provided, and a special symbol holding ball execution area common to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is provided. Is provided. Each value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 is stored in each area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a in accordance with the timing of entering the first starting port 64a. Similarly, the same value is stored in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in accordance with the timing of entering the second starting port 64b.

  Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The special random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

  The value of the special random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the value of the RAM 203 is registered at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number that is a special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the big hit random number table, it is determined that the special pattern is a big hit. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is used when the special symbol has a low probability (the period when the special symbol is in the low probability state) and when the special symbol has a high probability of becoming a special symbol jackpot from the low probability (the special symbol) ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the special symbol high probability and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the special symbol low probability are stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

  The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and is incremented by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , Reaches a maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), and then returns to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once every timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a, the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a special symbol big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, a display corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type is set to two types, “big hit A” and “big hit B”, and one of “big hit A” and “big hit B” is set by the special hit type counter C2. It is determined. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this special random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there are three random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol. It is stored in the random number table. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of the random numbers is three and the total number of the random numbers to be the big hit is three, so the probability of the big hit of the special symbol is “1/100”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are thirty random numbers which are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the value is “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Is stored in As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300 and the total number of jackpot random numbers is 30, so the probability of the special symbol jackpot is "1/10".

  In the present embodiment, the random number value of the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, and the random number value of the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability Therefore, a random number value for each jackpot is set so as not to be a duplicate value. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a big hit is changed depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state or the special symbol low probability state). Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value which is a special symbol jackpot to be predicted, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, in the special hit type counter C2 set in a hit type selection table (not shown), the hit type when the random value is “0 to 59” is “big hit A”. When the value is “60 to 99”, the big hit type is “big hit B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hits (big hits A and big hits B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. The random number value for determining the special symbol jackpot type from the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 (random value) is set by a special symbol jackpot type table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as a so-called short-time deviation, a long-time deviation, a normal reach, a super reach, and the like. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 42) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 17B) storing a random value that determines one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Is provided within.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, a fluctuation pattern selection table for selecting a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the special symbol 1 is set for each game state (normal game state, time-saving game state, probable change game state). It should be noted that, in the following description of the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113, the main control device 110 will be described based on the hit / failure determination result, the number of pending balls, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Then, the content (reach, super-reach, non-reach, etc.) of the rough variation pattern and the variation time are determined, and a variation pattern command indicating the determined content is set.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 to 22, main controller 110 selects a fluctuation pattern, and voice lamp controller 113 generates a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command from main controller 110. The mechanism to be determined will be described. A variation pattern selection table for determining a variation pattern between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is set in the variation pattern selection table 222a of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 as shown in FIGS. Have been. In the present embodiment, the change pattern selection table selected in the normal game state is shown, but the change pattern selection table is also set in the time-saving game state and the probable change game state.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the time from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is measured by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the clocking data measured by the RTC 292, and the 54-minute normal operation is performed. After the effect period (mode A) is set and the normal effect period elapses, a one-minute preparation period (mode B) is set, and after the preparation period, a five-minute time effect period (mode C) is set. You. The details of each of these periods will be described later. Depending on the set period, even if the fluctuation pattern command from main controller 110 is the same, the selected fluctuation pattern is different due to the different period. Is set. Here, even if different effects are set, the effects are composed of the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the fluctuation time of each effect, the result of the determination as to whether or not the result is appropriate, and the rough fluctuation are obtained. The contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) are configured to be the same. With such a configuration, main controller 110 does not need to determine individual variation patterns, and can reduce control addition. Further, the data amount of the variation pattern selection table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed.

  With reference to FIG. 18, the special figure 1 variation pattern selection table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table 202b will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, each variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 in accordance with the result of determining whether or not the special symbol 1 starts to fluctuate and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 at the time of variation start. It is configured to be selected. Here, the variation pattern to be determined is determined roughly by the type and duration of the variation pattern. Various types of “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined as the variation patterns selected when the hit / fail judgment result common to “big hit A” and “big hit B” is a big hit. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern, and if the result of determination is a hit, the variation pattern is determined based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. If the result of the determination is a win, the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 irrespective of the value of the suspended number. Here, when the result of the hit determination is a hit, the variation pattern that is “super reach” is set to be more easily selected than “normal reach”. Therefore, if the result of the hit determination is a hit, the frequency of the “super reach” change pattern is executed and the jackpot is increased, and the player can change to the big hit when the “super reach” change pattern is selected. Easy to have expectations.

  In addition, the normal reach jackpot variation pattern A, which is the jackpot variation pattern of “normal reach”, is displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 in the same symbol stop display mode, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed for a predetermined time. This is a variation display mode in which after the variation display, the stop symbol is displayed in the same symbol as the main symbol of the reach display mode. The fluctuation pattern of the "normal reach" jackpot is configured with a relatively short fluctuation time as compared with the fluctuation pattern of the "super reach" described later.

  The super-reach jackpot variation patterns A to C, which are the jackpot variation patterns of “super reach”, are displayed in the reach display mode, similarly to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern A, and thereafter, characters and the like are displayed, and the reach display mode is displayed. An effect is executed to determine whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the symbol indicated by. The fluctuation pattern of “super reach” has a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of “normal reach”.

  Next, as the variation patterns to be selected when the result of the determination of the success or failure of the special symbol 1 is out of the range, as the variation patterns for the out-of-office, “off for a short time (for a short time)” and “off for a long time (for a short time) ) "," Normal out of reach ", and" Super out of reach ". The short-time departure variation pattern, which is a variation pattern of “short-time departure”, is configured with a variation time (800 ms) shorter than other variation patterns, and is not displayed in the reach display mode, and is not displayed in the reach display mode for a predetermined time. Is displayed, the main symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. The long-time deviation fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern of “long-time deviation”, has a longer fluctuation time (12000 ms) than the short-time deviation fluctuation pattern. The normal-reach variation pattern, which is a variation pattern of “normal-reach deviation”, has a different display mode in that the middle symbol row Z2 is finally stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the symbol of the reach display mode with respect to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern. It is a display mode showing that the configured lottery result is out of order. The normal-reach deviation variation pattern is configured to be more easily selected than the super-reach deviation variation pattern described later when the result of determination is incorrect. Further, the super-reach out-of-reach variation pattern that is “super-reach out” is a display mode that is different from the super-reach jackpot variation pattern in that the super-reach out-of-reach variation pattern is finally displayed in a display mode showing the departure.

  When the result of the determination as to whether or not the special symbol 1 is out of order, the variation pattern selected depending on whether the reserved number of the special symbol 1 at the start of the variation is 0 to 2 or 3 to 4 The variation type counters CS1 are assigned to the respective variation patterns so that the ratios of the variation types are different.

  When the number of held items is 0 to 2, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is not assigned to the variation pattern of “short time departure” and is not selected. As a result, when the reserved number is 0 to 2, the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern becomes relatively long, and during this time, the game balls can easily enter the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period in which the change of the special symbol is stopped (a period in which the game lottery is not executed).

  Further, when the number of holdings is three or four, the ratio at which the fluctuation pattern of “short time departure” is selected is set high. Accordingly, when the number of held balls is close to the upper limit number of three to four, a short variation pattern is easily selected, so that even if the ball enters the first starting port 64a, the number of invalid balls equal to or larger than the number of held balls Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12 (b), a special figure 2 change pattern selection table A selected when starting the change of the special symbol 2 in the normal game state (low probability game state) will be described. If the hit determination result is a big hit, the configuration is the same as that of the above-described special figure 1 variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18).

  On the other hand, when the result of the determination is incorrect, each of the fluctuation patterns is divided into a case where the number of reserved special symbols 2 is 0 and a case where the number of reserved symbols is 1 to 4. It is assigned and set according to the value of CS1. If the number of reserved symbols is 0, only the fluctuation pattern that becomes the reach is set. Therefore, when the number of reserved special symbols 2 is 0, when the special symbol 2 starts to change, the reach It is configured such that the following variation pattern is selected. Thus, when the ball wins the second starting port 64b for a long time or a normal hit, if the number of held balls is 0, a variation pattern that can reach even if the ball is off is always selected. Thus, the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 tends to reach the player, and the player can play the game with a higher expectation of the big hit than the fluctuation of the special symbol 1.

  In addition, in the case of a long hit, a plurality of balls are likely to win and a reserved ball is easily generated, and a special notice display effect is executed for each change of the reserved ball. Then, in the last change of the reserved ball, a change pattern that becomes a reach is always selected, so that a more fresh effect can be provided to the player.

  On the other hand, when the hold number is one to four, if the result of the determination is wrong, only the fluctuation pattern of short-time departure and long-time departure is set, and the fluctuation pattern to reach is set. It has not been. With this configuration, the effect of determining whether or not the fluctuation when the number of reserved items becomes 0 is a big hit is performed during the display of the variation pattern that starts to vary when the number of reserved items is 1 to 4. And a plurality of fluctuations can be shown to the player as being related effects. In addition, it is possible to give an expectation to a jackpot for the previous change despite the change being out of order.

  FIG. 12C shows a special figure 2 change pattern selection table B for selecting a change pattern of the special symbol 2 during a time reduction or a high-probability game state (probable change).

  The ordinary hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one in the order of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the ordinary random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the ordinary initial random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the ordinary random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a normal symbol hit is set by a normal random number table 202c (see FIG. 17A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal random number counter C4 is If the value of the random number matches the value of the winning set in the normal winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. The ordinary random number table 202c (see FIG. 17 (a)) is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (period in the normal state of the normal symbol) and the probability that the normal symbol hits from the low probability. And a high probability probability (a period in which the symbol is usually in a time saving state), and the number of random hits included in each of the two types is set differently. Further, as the type of hit of the normal symbol, a normal hit and a long hit are set, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

  Here, in the normal winning of the ordinary symbol, the normal gaming state (low-probability gaming state), and in the big hitting gaming state, the operation in which the electric accessory 64c is operated in the open state in the open time of 0.2 seconds is executed once. It is a hit. In addition, during the working hours, during the probable change period, the operation of operating the electric accessory 64c in the open state with the open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long-time hit is a hit in which the operation in which the electric accessory 64c is operated in the open state in the open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice regardless of the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 64c and the opening operation for a long time are set to be the same during the reduced time period and the opening operation for a long time. Opening operation. Specifically, for example, the operation to be in the open state may be performed once for three seconds. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the second starting port 64b more at the time of hitting for a long time, and to easily perform the fluctuation display in the special symbol 2 during the normal game, The change display of the special symbol 2 on which a fresh notice display or the like is displayed allows the player to enjoy the change of the game effect.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17 (a), when the value of the obtained ordinary winning random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 20 at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol is obtained. Is determined. If it is one of 21 to 28, it is determined that it is a normal symbol long time hit. On the other hand, if the value of the obtained ordinary random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204 at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, it is determined that the ordinary symbol is the ordinary winning. In addition, at the time of the high probability of the normal symbol, the configuration was such that the long hit of the normal symbol was not set. However, at the time of the high probability of the normal symbol, the opening operation of the electric accessory 64c is the same as the long hit. The hit is substantially the same as the long hit.

  In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency of the operation of the electric accessory 64c can be reduced, and the frequency of entering the second starting port 64b can be reduced. Therefore, the player mainly plays the ball in the first starting port 64a, thereby increasing the consumption of the game ball by the player and increasing the profit on the game store side. On the other hand, during the short working hours and the probable change period in which the probability is high, the opportunity to operate the electric accessory 64c can be given with a probability of “1 / 1.2”, and the chance of entering the second starting port 64b is increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the game ball by the player and set a gaming state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game with a high probability of playing the game, and can play the game for a longer time.

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, a stopped symbol (second symbol) , A symbol “○” is displayed. If the value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4 is “5 to 20”, the second starting port 64b is opened “0.2 seconds × 1 time” as a normal hit. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the second starting port 64b is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol hits, The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened. If the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is "21 to 28", the second starting port 64b is opened for "2 seconds × 2 times" as a long time hit.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in the normal random number table 202c for high probability times (see FIG. 17A). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is obtained, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 3 seconds. If the value of the obtained ordinary random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stopped symbol (the second symbol). The symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the second starting port 64b is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the release period of the second starting port 64b. Is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, so that the ball easily enters the second starting port 64b. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second start port 64b is opened only for “2 seconds × 2 times” when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time And the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the ordinary random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32). Are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 42).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 16, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 42), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 41). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , The NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 17C, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls. It has a counter 203d, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, an opening number counter 203h, a long time opening flag 203i, a time reduction medium time counter 203j, and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the special symbol 1 and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Each value of the hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first starting port 64a, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored. Also, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the special symbol 2.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores an ordinary random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is obtained at the timing when the ball passes through the right or left through gate 67, and the obtained data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). ) Are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) in the vacant areas indicated by ()). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winning prize stored in the other reserved area is stored as in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is a variation display (third symbol display) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first starting port 64a (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first starting port 64a and the number of retained balls in the fluctuation display increases, the special value 1 is incremented to a maximum value of four. It is added (see S404 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 33).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N of times of the fluctuation display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 33 and S405 in FIG. 35). . The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning in the second starting port 64b, and the other configuration is the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Detailed description is omitted.

  Each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 holds the variable display retained by the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of retained balls of the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is the actual number of retained balls of the variable display retained by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f counts up to four times the number of waiting balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of retained balls of the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of 4 ( (See S704 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 38).

  When the ball passes through the right or left through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is less than 4, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is obtained. Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the right or left through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (FIG. 39, S703: No).

  The opening number counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of times the electric article 64c is opened.

  The opening time counter 203h is a counter for counting the opening time of the electric article 64c.

  The long-time release flag 203i is a flag indicating that a long time is being hit. The long-time release flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S629 executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Although illustration is omitted, it is usually set to off based on the end of the long time winning of the symbol. Specifically, in the process of S1105 in the electric accessory opening process (S1005 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the process is set to OFF when it is determined that the opening number counter 203g is 0. .

  The time reduction counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203j during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203j is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and a special symbol jackpot is determined, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Is done. In other words, when the special symbol hits, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is newly set regardless of the value of the time reduction counter 203j.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front opening and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the sphere launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the sphere according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the sphere control is instructed by the main control device 110. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown). The launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a continuous announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the contents of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (a), the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a reserved effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 24 (a)), and a pre-reading effect lottery table 222c (FIG. )), A pre-reading effect selection table 222d (see FIGS. 24 (c) to (d)), a notice selection table 222e (see FIGS. 25 (a) to (b)), a touch notice selection table (see FIG. 26 (a)). ) Is stored. As shown in FIG. 23B, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, Flag 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, winning information storage area 223f, ordinary winning information storage area 223g, sub long open flag 223h, open effect flag 223i, hold effect counter 223j, effect counter 223k, time effect execution flag 223m, setting Time storage area 223n, preparation period flag 223o, start period flag 223p, SW valid time counter 223q, sensor valid time counter 223r, touch counter 223s, background mode storage area 223t, fluctuation counter 223u, SW counter 223v. Directing mode storage area 223w, addition command storage area 223X, addition command reception flag 223Y, other memory areas 223z are at least provided.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 47) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Directing). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are read from the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a long time from the address designation to the data output in reading the first page of data, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required to start up the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at a high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 61) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S2001 in FIG. 61) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list described later (see FIG. 31) transmitted from the MPU 231, and outputs one of the frames of a first frame buffer 236 b and a second frame buffer 236 c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 63B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  When drawing an image using nonresident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data reside in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first start port 64a is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image in which a result of a lottery performed in the main control device 110 is displayed by a fluctuation effect.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 61).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. During the transfer of the remaining image data, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (not shown). 3) Display on the symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 turns on the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the “X” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used to determine the lottery performed by the main control device 110. Judging the result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", the image showing it will be displayed for a certain period after stopping the variable effect, and if it is "special symbol loss", the image showing it will be stopped. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user must wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and images indicating “O” and “X” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the power is turned on. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 each time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the fluctuation is started on the third symbol display device 81 although the fluctuation effect is started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the effect is not immediately started.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the received error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and for each sub-area, the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the character ROM 234, image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 to image data required for subsequent image rendering, from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame for the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image of one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the third symbol display device 81 can display the read image of one frame.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect A display data table corresponding to an ending effect and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  Further, since the first starting port 64a is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters, the electric accessory is usually opened as a jackpot of a symbol and the ball is moved to the second starting port. When the ball easily enters 64b, the number of prize balls increases. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls is difficult to reduce or the state in which the number of balls is not reduced even when playing a game. It is possible to obtain a sense of period in which a special symbol jackpot can be obtained in a state where there is no special symbol. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variation effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables, as the variation display data table which is a display data table for the variation effect.

  Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light in the image are defined as one frame of rendering content defined corresponding to each address. For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table.

  If the MPU 231 specifies to display any of the backgrounds (the sea, the beach, the background of the preparation period, and the background dedicated to the time effect) corresponding to the background mode, the MPU 231 determines whether The rear image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time elapses.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. The identification is performed based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. , And the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, whereby the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the immediately preceding variable effect stopped symbol is switched to the offset information of the variable effect stopped symbol performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numeral of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the numeral. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 28) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is used to add An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. Thus, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Thus, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 30). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 30 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 30, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list described later (see FIG. 31) is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 30, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2005 in FIG. 61). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S3505 in FIG. 71 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 63 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 63B) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 63 (b) (S2309). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 37 to 41) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 69 to 70 (b)) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3401 in FIG. 71A), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 71B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72) for transferring image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction for the image, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 31) described below that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 31) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 63 (b) ), The pointer updating process (see S3105 in FIG. 70B) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 31), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite based on the transfer data table is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on an image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the content of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And the effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads the image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 63 (b) Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3107 in FIG. 69). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72) executed by the MPU 231. Is In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 72). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 72). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer (hereinafter, referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 73).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 63B) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 of FIG. 73).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the counter value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. In the corresponding buffer area.

  Further, the special random number counter C1, the special random number counter C2, and the ordinary random number counter C4 are updated (S103). More specifically, the special random number counter C1, the special random number counter C2, and the normal random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are set to the maximum values (299, 99, and 239 in this embodiment, respectively). When reached, each is cleared to zero. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start win) in the first start port 64a (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 39. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, the special symbol change process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of variable display suspensions in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204). S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation is set. (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 42) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After the processing of S207 is performed, the processing of S213 is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S204 that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained. (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S208 is 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1. The subtraction is performed (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 42) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved-ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start processing is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , A special symbol lottery is held. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the special random number counter C1. Whether it is A or jackpot B is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), it is determined what the jackpot type is among the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A and jackpot B) (S217), and the jackpot type is determined. Is larger than the big hit B, 100 is set in the time reduction counter 203j of the RAM 203 (S218). After that, the process of S220 is performed. If the jackpot type is the jackpot A, the game state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability, which is a certain change period (S219). Then, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S220), and the present process ends.

  In the processing of S216, if the result of the current lottery is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203j is 1 or more (S221), and the value of the time reduction counter 203j is 1 If this is the case (S221: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S222), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203j during the working hours is 0 (S221: No), the process of S222 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a special symbol change start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S213). The special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 33) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32). Based on the values of various counters stored in an execution area provided in common with the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (judgement) of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol loss” is performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol change start process (S213), first, each of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The value is obtained (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the game state is currently in the probable change period (high-probability game state) (S302). The determination as to whether or not the period is the probable change period is performed by determining whether a probable change flag (not shown) is on. This probability change flag is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the big hit game.

  When it is determined that the probable change is being performed (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, and the process proceeds to S303. In the processing of S303, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained based on the value of the special random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability (S303). ). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability. As described above, the random number value to be a special symbol jackpot is “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168”. , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "are set, and the value of the special random number counter C1 and the hits of these are set. If the random numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S302 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (S302: No), the processing of S304 is executed. In the process of S304, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained based on the value of the special random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability (S304). ). Specifically, the value of the special random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the three random numbers stored in the special symbol large random number table for low probability. Three random numbers of “7, 107, 282” are set as the random numbers of the special symbol big hits. It is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the processing of S305, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained in the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). Yes), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot) In B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 59”, it is determined to be the jackpot A (16R jackpot, a period of probable change until the next jackpot after the jackpot game) and “60 to 99”. Is determined to be a jackpot B (16R jackpot, 100 times of normal symbol time reduction period).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Note that the relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is specified in advance by a table or the like.

  In the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the hit / fail determination, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuating display mode to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuating time and the result of the determination. In the main control device 110, even if the display mode is the out-of-reach display, the audio lamp control device 113 can be switched to the out-of-reach display mode that is not the reach display mode as long as the change time is the same. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, as the variation patterns for detachment, “out of contact (for a long time)”, “out of contact (for a short period of time)”, “out of contact normal reach”, “out of contact super reach”, and “out of contact special reach” are specified. ing. As the fluctuation patterns of the jackpot A and the jackpot B, various types of “normal reach” and various types of “super reach” are defined.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of the out-of-spec is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is stored based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 as in the process of S308. To determine.

  Next, an addition command set in the variation pattern selection table 202b is set corresponding to the selected variation pattern (S310). As shown in FIG. 82, this addition command is determined based on the result of the hit / fail judgment, the number of pending balls, and the value of the variation type counter CS1. The addition command, as shown in FIG. 19, indicates that the fluctuation time is composed of a fixed time and an addition time, and indicates the addition time. In the present embodiment, the fixed time is configured with the same variation time as the short-time departure, and the addition time is configured with a time other than the fixed time for the variation pattern that becomes the super reach. With such a configuration, in the fixed time, the fluctuation time until the reach display mode is set can be set to the same fluctuation time as the short-time departure, and the display of the character or the like that becomes the super reach from the reach display mode is added to the addition command. It can be set based on: Therefore, since the display can be divided and set for the variable display mode having a long fluctuation time, the control load at the start of the fluctuation can be reduced.

  Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S311). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S312). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 42). You. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first starting port 64a. This is a process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the holding process of the values indicated by the various random number counters and the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first starting port 64a (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first starting port 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64a (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is held) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether there is a prize in the first starting port 64a (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first starting port 64a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than four. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first opening 64a (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 42) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S405, the values of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the special symbol of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the one reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, with respect to S407 to S413, in each of the above-described processing of S401 to S406, the processing for winning the first starting port 64a is only changed to the processing for winning the second starting port 64b. Since the same processing is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When a game ball is won in the second starting port 64b, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 are also acquired and stored as a reserved ball, and the corresponding special symbol 2 is obtained. It is stored in an empty reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  In this way, by acquiring the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 similar to the special symbol 1 for the special symbol 2 based on the ball entering the second starting port 64b, the special symbol 2 is obtained. Since the lottery can be executed by using a common random number for the symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the winning probability can be made constant even for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

  After executing the process of S413, a prefetch process is executed (S414). The details of the pre-reading process (S414) will be described with reference to FIG. 36. Then, a process of judging in advance each lottery result executed at the start of the fluctuation is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is selected based on the incoming ball, but may be selected at the start of the change. With such a configuration, a storage area for storing the value of each counter is not required until the start of the fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Further, among the respective counters, a part of the counters (for example, only the change type counter CS1) may be obtained at the start of the change. With this configuration, it is possible to acquire a counter related to the hit / fail judgment at the time of entering the ball, and to obtain a counter irrelevant to the hit / fail judgment at a later time. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the prefetching process (S414), which is one of the start winning processes (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S414).

  In the pre-reading process (S414 in FIG. 36), first, a determination is made as to whether or not the change has been started based on the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 (S421). The determination of the success or failure at the start of the change is based on whether the game state at the start of the change is a normal game state (low probability) or a certain change game state (high probability game state). 203a, the determination as to whether or not the counter value is fluctuated and displayed prior to each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b and the type of the hit.

  In the process of S422, it is determined whether or not the determination result executed in the process of S421 is a hit (S422). When it is determined that the result is a hit (S422: Yes), the hit type is the big hit A or a special hit type counter C2 (S423). When it is determined that the winning type is the big hit A (S423: Yes), a winning command indicating the big hit A is set (S424). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot B (S423: No), a winning command indicating the jackpot B is set (S425). Further, in the process of S422, when it is determined that the result of the discrimination determination is out (S422: No), a winning winning command is set (S426).

  As described above, before the start of the change, the result of the pass / fail determination in advance is output as a winning command to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the holding ball is established. It is possible to recognize the result of the determination of the success or failure and the hit type in advance. Therefore, based on the winning command, the sound lamp control device 113 informs the player of the result of the judgment on the holding ball in advance. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the color of the holding symbol to a color indicating the result of the judgment. , Such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the result of the determination as to whether or not the ball is in the reserved ball). Further, since one winning command is output to the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can recognize the establishment of the reserved ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric power attached to the second starting port 64b are provided. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 64c and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83 and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting port 64b are performed. While being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is 0 (S604: S604). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607).

  Next, a normal symbol change start process is executed (S608), and this process ends. The normal symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. In the processing of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S609). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S637 or S638 in FIG. 38 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S609, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S609: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S609, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S609: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S610). In the process of S610, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S627 or the process of S631 in FIG. 38, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display. The setting is made so that a stop display (lighting display) is performed in the device 83. On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S635 in FIG. 38, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) on the second symbol display device 83. Display). When the stop display is set by the process of S610, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. Upon completion, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S627, the process of S631, or the process of S635 in FIG.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S611). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S611: Yes), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is set (S612), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the process of S612, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed next, the electric accessory 64c is opened. The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S630 or S634 of FIG. 38 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S611, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S611: No), the process of S612 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38, the ordinary symbol change start process (S608) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change start processing (S608). The normal symbol change start process (S608) is a process for setting the start of the normal symbol change executed in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 37) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32). This is the process to be executed.

  It is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S621). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S621: Yes), the process proceeds to S624.

  In the process of S621, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S621: No), it is determined whether it is during the probability change or the time saving (S622). If it is neither a positive change nor a time reduction (S622: No), the process proceeds to S624.

  If it is probable or time saving (S622: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the random number counter C4 and the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability times (see FIG. 17A), a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S623). Specifically, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the ordinary random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 17A). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see FIG. 17A).

  In the process of S624, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 in FIG. The lottery result is obtained based on the low probability probability normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 17A) as to whether or not the winning is a normal symbol (S624). Specifically, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the ordinary random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 17A). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 20”, it is determined that the normal hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “21 to 28”, the normal symbol is determined. It is determined that it is a long time hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary design (see FIG. 17A).

  In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be hard to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (ie, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting opening 64b is opened. This is to suppress as much as possible a ball trying to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the second starting opening 64b. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second starting opening 64b, even if the ball is prevented from entering the second starting opening 64b during the special symbol jackpot, the second starting opening 64b is provided. A lot of balls enter in 64b. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second starting port 64b becomes the maximum (four times).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the process of S623 or S624 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S625). It is determined whether the type of the normal symbol hit is a long hit (S626). When it is determined that the normal symbol hit type is long hit (S626: Yes), a display mode for long hit is set (S627). In the process of S627, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol "O" is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol). Next, a long-time start command is set (S627), and the long-time release flag 203i is turned on (S629). Then, the process shifts to S630.

  In the process of S626, when it is determined that the normal symbol hit type is the normal hit (S626: No), the display mode at the time of the normal hit is set (S631). Next, it is determined whether it is during the probability change or the time saving (S632).

  Then, if it is during the probability change or the time reduction (S632: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S633). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S633: Yes), the process proceeds to S634. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second starting port 64b as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off. The number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 64c are set.

  In the process of S633, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S633: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is set to 2 seconds and the number of times of opening is set to 2 times. Then (S630), the process proceeds to S636. In the process of S630, 2 is set to the number-of-opening times counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the opening time counter 203h.

  In the process of S632, when neither the probability change nor the time saving is being performed (S632: No), the process proceeds to the process of S634. In the process of S632, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S634), and the process proceeds to S636. In the process of S634, 1 is set to the number-of-opening times counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set to the opening time counter 203h.

  In the process of S625, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S625: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S635). In the process of S635, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the processing shifts to S636.

  In the process of S636, it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S636). If the probability is changing (S636: Yes), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S637). Then, the present process ends. On the other hand, if the probability change is not in progress in the process of S636 (S636: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S638), and this process ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to when the ordinary symbol has a low probability. Since the release period of the second starting port 64b is very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second starting port 64b.

  In the present embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of opening per long time are the same operation as the case where a normal symbol hits in the state of constant change and time saving, but not limited thereto. It may be configured to set.

  Next, a through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 32), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display is held in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S703). : No), and proceeds to the process of S706. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the ordinary winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the area (S705), and the process proceeds to S706. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S706, it is determined based on the acquired value of the ordinary random number counter C4 whether or not the normal symbol is correct at the start of the change (S706), and the process proceeds to S707. In the process of S707, it is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is determined (S707).

  In the processing of S707, if it is determined that the result of the determination of the normal symbol is a hit (S707: Yes), it is determined whether the hit type of the result of the determination of the normal symbol is a long time hit (S708). When it is determined that the hit type of the result of the determination of the ordinary symbol is “long time winning” (S708: Yes), a long time winning general figure winning command is set (S709), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S708 that the winning type of the result of the determination of the ordinary symbol is “normal winning” (S708: No), a winning general symbol winning command is set (S710).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S707 that the result of the determination of the success or failure of the ordinary symbol is out of place (S707: No), the out-of-place figure winning command is set (S711), and this processing ends.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not, the RAM 203 is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the processing also shifts to S913 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S913 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S913). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S914, S915).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S914, S915) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S914 and S915) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S911.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S904: Yes), S907: Yes), and transmits a status command based on the long-time release flag 203i (S908). Next, while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power-off occurrence information is cleared (S909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S910), and the process proceeds to S911. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S911, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is determined. Send a prize ball command. In addition, a command for the number of held balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 33) and the start winning process (see FIG. 35) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the winning command set in the start winning process and the pre-reading process (see FIG. 36) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is executed (S1005). In the electric auditors product opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric auditors product 64c is started when the opening / closing control of the electric auditors product 64c is set by the process of S612 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 37). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S630 or S634 in FIG. The details of the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 34), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 34) ends, the first symbol display device is activated. The variable display executed in 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (the first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 34). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S637 or the process of S638 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 38), the variation symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S610 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 37), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S627 or the process of S631 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 38). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1009: No), the initial time is maintained until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1) are repeated. , The initial value of the ordinary random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1008, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 40 has been executed, the processing at S1012 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not initialized in the initialization process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43, the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory release processing (S1005). The electric accessory opening processing (S1005) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 42), and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64c is set by the processing in S612 of the ordinary symbol change processing (see FIG. 37). In this case, the processing is for controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 64c.

  In the electric accessory opening processing, first, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 64c is being opened (S1101). When it is determined that the electric accessory 64c is being opened (S1101: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the electric accessory 64c based on whether or not the opening time counter 203h is 0 (S1102). If it is determined that it is the closing timing of the electric accessory 64c (S1102: Yes), the closing of the electric accessory 64c is set (S1103), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1102 that the timing is not the closing timing of the electric accessory 64c (S1102: No), the opening time counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S1104), and this processing ends. As a result, since 1 can be subtracted at the interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), the time can be accurately measured from the value set in the process of S1109.

  In the processing of S1101, when it is determined that the electric accessory 64c is not being opened (S1101: No), it is determined whether the opening number counter 203g is greater than 1 (S1105). When the number-of-openings counter 203g is 0 (S1105: No), this processing ends. If the number-of-opening counter 203g is larger than 1 (S1105: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c (S1106). If it is determined that the timing is not the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c (S1106: No), this processing ends.

  In the process of S1106, when it is determined that it is the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c (S1106: Yes), the opening counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S1107), and the opening of the electric accessory 64c is set (S1108). A value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203h (S1109), and this processing ends.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 44, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is on, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, a so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing of S1318 (see FIG. 46). ) Are determined to be started during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 46, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 46), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1318. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1318 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the current startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure and the power-off processing in S1318. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up processing is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1318 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1318, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1318 (see S1317 in FIG. 46). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is executed, so that the process of S1208 with the power-off flag turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S1318 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1209), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210). The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut down, for example, and the process of step S1208 is performed via the processes of steps S1204 to S1206. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process skips S1209, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1210, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1210), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1211), and shifts to the main processing. Thereafter, it is determined whether a status command has been received from main controller 110 (S1212). This status command indicates whether or not a normal symbol has been hit for a long time on the basis of the long-time release flag 203i in the processing of S908 of the startup processing (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Command. In the process of S1212, when it is determined that the status command has been received (S1212: Yes), the sub long time open flag 223h is set based on the received status command (S1213). Here, if the received status command indicates that the vehicle is hitting for a long time, the sub long time release flag 223h is turned on. Set 223h to off.

  As described above, when the power is turned on, the command that can determine whether or not the symbol has been hit for a long time is output from the main controller 110, so that the sound lamp controller 113 can also determine the state. Can be.

  The reason why the clearing process of S1209 is skipped is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is performed via the process of S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  In the process of S1214, a time setting process is executed (S1214). The time setting process (S1214) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, the time setting process (S1214), which is one of the start-up processes (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the time setting process (S1214). In the time setting process (FIG. 45, S1214), the setting of the setting switch 291 is determined, and it is determined whether or not to perform the time effect. If the time effect is set, the time information is obtained from the RTC 292. Then, based on the time information, a process of setting the preparation period and the time production period in the set time storage area 223n is executed.

In the time setting process (FIG. 45, S1214), first, it is determined whether the setting of the setting switch 291 is “1” or “3” (S1221). If it is determined that the setting of the setting switch 291 is not “1” or “3” (S1221: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting of the setting switch 291 is the setting “1” or the setting “3” (S1221: Yes), time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1222).
As the time information acquired here, the value of “hour, minute” is acquired. The RTC 292 is a timekeeping unit having a battery therein, and has a configuration in which the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled. The operation time of the internal battery is about three and a half years. The RTC 292 also has a calendar function, and is configured to be able to determine “year, month, day”. Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is configured to be able to control to change to a background image dedicated to Christmas or to display a special character such as Santa.

  It is determined whether the obtained time information is within the time limit data (S1223). Here, in this embodiment, the term data is set to three years within three and a half years which is the capacity of the internal battery of the RTC 292. The date three years after the date preset at the time of manufacture is set as the expiration date data, and if it is determined that the date is after that date, the time effect setting is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem that the time is delayed or the like due to a shortage of battery capacity or the like, and the start timing of the time effect cannot be synchronized between the pachinko machines 10.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether the date is three years after a date set in advance at the time of manufacturing, and to set the time effect execution flag 223m described later to ON. The voltage value of the battery supplying power to the RTC 292 is determined, and when the voltage value is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage (for example, equal to or higher than 3.3 V), the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON. Is also good. Here, it is desirable to set the voltage to be equal to or higher than the voltage at which the RTC 292 can operate normally.

  In the process of S1223, if it is determined that the acquired time information is outside the time limit data, that is, three years or more have elapsed (S1223: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired time information is within the time limit data, that is, within three years (S1223: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON (S1224). Based on the acquired time information, a preparation period and a time production period are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223n (S1225).

  In the present embodiment, a preparation period and a time production period for 24 hours are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223n based on the acquired time information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , A 54 minute period for executing the game may be set, the period may be measured by counting down or counting up, and the preparation period may be set based on the passage of 54 minutes. Alternatively, the time after 54 minutes may be set, and when the time has been reached, the time of the next period may be set. With this configuration, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at lower cost.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the processing of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. S1302 to S1310 are mainly processing relating to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). , S1311, the variable display setting process in S1312, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output mode of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. The frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing in S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1310), and the flow shifts to the processing in S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). Details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of this command determination processing (FIG. 47, S1311) is executed, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1312 ends, a prefetch effect selection processing is executed (S1313). This prefetch effect selection processing (S1313) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After executing the pre-reading effect process (S1313), the process of the synchronous effect management process (S1314) is executed. The synchronous effect management process (S1314) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S1314 ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1315). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1315 (S1315: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1317), and the power-off processing is executed (S1318). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1319). In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Also, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1316), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1316: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1316: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S1401). If a variation pattern command has been received (S1401: Yes), a variation pattern reception process is executed (S1402). After that, this processing ends.

  Here, the variation pattern receiving process (S1402) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern reception processing.

  In the variation pattern reception process (S1402), first, the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1421), and a variation pattern selection process is performed (S1422). In the variation pattern selection process (S1422), a process of selecting a variation pattern or a preview effect is executed based on the set effect mode.

  Here, the variation pattern selection processing (S1422) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection processing (S1422). In the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 49, S1422), first, the value of the effect counter 223k is obtained (S1431). It is determined whether the effect mode set in the effect mode storage area 223w is the effect mode A (S1432). If it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1432: Yes), the result of the determination as to whether or not the corresponding pattern is to be obtained, the number of held items, and the type of the variation type counter CS1 are obtained from the corresponding special symbol variation pattern selection table A (FIG. 18 or FIG. 21). A variation pattern is selected and set based on the value (S1433). Thereafter, a notice effect display is selected and set from the notice selection table A (see FIG. 25 (a)) based on the result of the determination as to whether or not the notice is correct (S1434). It is selected and set from the touch announcement selection table 222f (see FIG. 26A) (S1435).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1432, when it is determined that the effect mode A is not set (S1432: No), it is determined whether the effect mode B is set (S1436). If it is determined that the effect mode B has been set (S1436: Yes), a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table B of the corresponding special symbol (see FIG. 20A or 22A). Is set (S1437).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1436, when it is determined that the effect mode B is not set, that is, the effect mode C is set (S1436: No), the corresponding special symbol variation pattern selection table C (FIG. 20 (b) or FIG. 22 (b)) to select and set the variation pattern (S1438). A notice effect display is selected and set from the notice selection table C (S1439). A notice effect display is selected and set from the touch notice selection table 222f (see FIG. 26A) (S1440).

  In this way, it is possible to configure by switching the selected variation pattern based on the set effect mode. Further, the selected fluctuation pattern is the same as the fluctuation time and the result of the pass / fail determination specified by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 using the fluctuation pattern command, and the effect display contents and the reach display mode are displayed based on the fluctuation time. (Normal reach, super reach, or the type thereof) is changed and selected by the audio ramp control device 113. Therefore, since the result of the determination as to whether the game is related to the profit of the player and the variation time related to the gambling are not changed in accordance with the value determined by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the design value of the pachinko machine 10 is determined in advance. Can play games.

  In addition, the announcement effect is also determined based on the result of the pass / fail determination at the start of the change, the content of the change pattern (normal reach, super reach, etc.), and the value of the effect counter 223k. There is no need for processing, and the control load can be reduced. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing of displaying the advance notice is determined in advance by the fluctuation pattern, and a display advance notice display command indicating the timing is set, so that the display control apparatus 114 displays the notice at that timing. Is set to be

  Here, returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. After the fluctuation pattern selection processing (FIG. 49, S1422) is executed, the pending effect selection processing is executed (S1423). In the holding effect selection process (S1423), a process of setting a notice effect to be displayed for the start of change of the holding ball winning in the second starting port 64b for a long time is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 50, this suspended effect selection processing (S1423) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the suspended effect selection processing (S1423).

  In the holding effect lottery process (FIG. 50, S1423), first, it is determined whether the value of the holding effect counter 223j is greater than 0 (S1451). When it is determined that the value of the pending effect counter 223j is equal to or less than 0 (S1451: No), whether or not the pending ball for which the variation starts is the variation start of the retaining ball for which the open rendering flag 223i is set to ON. It is determined (S1452). When it is determined that the fluctuation of the reserved ball whose opening effect flag 223i is set to ON is started (S1452: Yes), the holding is performed in accordance with the number of reserved balls for which the opening effect flag 223i is set ON. The value of the effect counter 223j is set (S1453). Here, the opening effect flag 223i is set based on the hit of the normal symbol for a long time, so that the retained ball that has been opened and formed by entering the second starting port 64b can be determined. This is a flag that is set to ON in response to the reserved ball. In the process of S1453, for example, if the open effect flag 223i is set to ON and the number of retained balls is three, the value of the reserved effect counter 223j is set to 3. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1452 that the fluctuation of the reserved ball in which the opening effect flag 223i is set to off is started (S1452: No), this processing is ended.

  In the process of S1451, if it is determined that the value of the pending effect counter 223j is greater than 0 (S1451: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired (S1454). Based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223k, a notice effect display mode corresponding to the value of the hold effect counter 223j is selected and set from the hold effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 24A) (S1455).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), the holding effect selection table 222b has a holding effect for each of the holding result for which the change is started or the holding result for which the open effect flag 223i is set to ON. Each announcement effect display is set by the value of the effect counter 223k corresponding to the value of the counter 223j. Therefore, each announcement effect display mode is determined based on the result of the success / failure determination, the value of the effect counter 223k, and the value of the suspended effect counter 223j.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 21), even if the result of determination as to whether or not the hit is out of order, if the number of the reserved balls is 0, be sure to Since the variation pattern of “reach out of reach” is set to be selected, if “1” indicating that the number of reserved balls indicated by the reserved effect counter 223j is 0, a notice display mode such as “Large chance” is displayed. Are more easily selected than when the value of the pending effect counter 223j is “2 to 4”, so that the player is more likely to expect big hits.

  Therefore, when the player enters the second starting port 64b for a long time, a continuous effect is executed between the held balls, and the reach of the last variation always becomes the reach display mode. The game can be played with a higher expectation of a big hit than the lottery that has entered the first starting port 64a (the lottery that has entered the first starting port 64a in the normal gaming state). Therefore, the player can play the game with a higher expectation of occurrence per a long time, and can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  When the process of S1455 is executed, a display announcement display command for instructing the announcement effect display set in the process of S1455 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set (generated) (S1456). Thereafter, the value of the pending effect counter 223j is decremented by 1 (S1457), and this process ends.

  Here, returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. After the holding effect selection process (FIG. 50, S1423) is executed, a holding number shift process is executed (S1424). In the retained number transfer process (S1424), if the special symbol 2 is displayed in a fluctuating manner, it indicates that the retained ball has been established based on the opening of the electric accessory 64c based on the long hit of the ordinary symbol. The process of shifting the open effect flag 223i to an area indicating the number of reserves immediately before the open effect flag 223i is executed for the reserved ball for which the open effect flag 223i is set to ON.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, this suspended number transfer processing (S1424) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the suspended number transfer processing (S1424). In the suspended number transfer processing (FIG. 51, S1424), first, it is determined whether or not it is a trigger to start the change of the special symbol 2 (the special figure 2) (S1461). If it is determined that it is an opportunity to start the change of the special symbol 2 (S1461: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a reserved ball for which the opening effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1462). If it is determined that there is no pending ball for which the opening effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1462: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved balls with the open effect flag 223i set to ON are stored (S1462: Yes), the open effect flags 223i corresponding to each reserved ball number are respectively set to the immediately preceding reserve. The data is shifted and stored in an area corresponding to the number of balls (S1463). On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1461 that the start of the change of the special symbol 1 has been triggered (S1461: No), this processing ends.

  The opening effect flag 223i is set individually for each of the reserved balls 1 to 4 of the special symbol 2 and the execution area, and is set to ON for the reserved ball established during a long time hit. You. Then, when the announcement effect display corresponding to the digestion of the reserved ball is set with the digestion of the retained ball, the opening effect flag 223i is also shifted to the area corresponding to the immediately preceding retained ball. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the ball is a hold ball that has been established during a long hit.

  Here, returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. After executing the suspended number transfer processing (S1424), the change number counter 223u is incremented by 1 (S1425), and this processing ends. The change number counter 223u is a counter for counting the number of changes in the special symbol after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and is reset to 0 as an initial value when the power is turned off.

  In the present embodiment, the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of fluctuations is maintained by providing a dedicated backup power supply even if the power is turned off. May be configured so that the time count data is acquired by the RTC 292 and the number of times of change per day can be identified. When timekeeping data is periodically acquired from the RTC 292 and the date is updated, the value of the variation counter 223u is stored in a storage area corresponding to the date, and then the value of the variation counter 223u is an initial value. A configuration for resetting to 0 or the like is conceivable.

  Here, returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1403). When the stop type command is received (S1403: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1404), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1405). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 54) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1403: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1406). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1406: Yes), a reserved ball number command receiving process is executed (S1407). In the reserved ball count command receiving process (S1407), based on the received reserved ball count command, the reserved ball count is stored in the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b, respectively. Is executed, and it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is being hit for a long time. If the symbol is being hit for a long time, the opening effect flag 223i is turned on for the newly stored ball of the special symbol 2 which is newly stored. Execute the process set in. In the processing of S1407, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the updated special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the end of the process in S1407, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 52, the reception processing of the number of retained balls command (S1407) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the pending ball count command receiving process (S1407).

  In the reserved ball number command reception process (FIG. 52, S1407), first, the respective retained ball numbers are extracted from the received command, and are respectively stored in the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. The number of reserved balls is set (S1471). Next, it is determined whether the sub long time release flag 223h is ON (S1472). When it is determined that the sub long time release flag 223h is ON (S1472: Yes), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command of the special symbol 2 has been received (S1473). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command of the special symbol 2 has been received (S1473: Yes), the release effect flag 223i of the corresponding reserved ball number is set to ON (S1474). On the other hand, in the processing of S1472, when it is determined that the sub long time release flag 223h is off (S1472: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S1473 that the reserved ball number command of the special symbol 2 has not been received. (S1473: No), this process ends.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b or when a special symbol is drawn. Therefore, each time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 are processed by the processing of S1407. Can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 and the special symbol. Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting a winning start or at the time of drawing a special symbol. Can be corrected to match the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the processing of S1407 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is issued. Is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1406, when the command of the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1406: No), it is then determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1408). If a winning command is received (S1408: Yes), a winning command receiving process is executed (S1409), and the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223f (S1410). Then, the process returns to the main processing. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the main controller 110 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3, and The obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3 are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number storage area 203b, respectively. Immediately after the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired in the main control device 110, separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery, the respective values of the acquired counters C1 and C2 are used to determine their respective values. Various information obtained when the lottery is performed is pre-read (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning command including various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Here, the winning command reception processing (S1409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the winning command receiving process (S1409). In the winning command receiving process, first, it is determined whether or not the sub long time opening flag 223h is ON, that is, whether a long time is being won (S1481). When it is determined that the sub long time release flag 223h is off (S1481: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub long time release flag 223h is ON (S1481: Yes), it is determined whether or not a winning command of the special symbol 2 has been received (S1482).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1482 that the winning command of the special symbol 2 has not been received (S1482: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command of the special symbol 2 has been received (S1482: Yes), the release effect flag 223i of the corresponding reserved ball number is set to ON (S1483).

  Here, the opening effect flag 223i is set for each of the holding area and the execution area. Therefore, the opening effect flag 223i corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the received special symbol 2 winning command is set to ON. As a result, it is possible to distinguish between the stored balls stored for a long time and the other stored balls.

  Here, returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1408, if a special symbol winning command has not been received (S1408: No), it is then determined whether a normal symbol winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1411). If it is determined that the normal symbol winning command has been received (S1411), the normal symbol winning information indicated by the received winning command is set in the normal winning information storage area 223g (S1412). Then, the process returns to the main processing. As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4 is acquired by the main control device 110, and the acquired value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4 is It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203f. Immediately after the value of the ordinary winning counter C4 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original random drawing is performed from the acquired value of the ordinary random number counter C4 separately from the original ordinary symbol winning lottery. Various kinds of information obtained in the case of the prefetching are predicted (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning symbol of a normal symbol including various information (whether or not, hit type) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1411, when the normal symbol winning command is not received (S1411: No), it is determined whether the addition command is received (S1413). If it is determined that the addition command has been received (S1413: Yes), the information indicated by the received addition command is set in the addition command storage area 223x (S1414). The addition command reception flag 223y is set to ON (S1415).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1413, when it is determined that the addition command has not been received (S1413: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1416), and returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1312). This variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to execute a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process (FIG. 54, S1312), first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1501). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1505. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1501: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1502), and then, in S1433, S1437, and S1438 of the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 49). In any of the processes, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1503).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the processing of S1505.

  In the process of S1505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1505). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1505: No), the process of S1510 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1506), and the stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is read from the RAM 223. It is acquired (S1507). Next, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509.

  In the processing of S1509, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1509). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the processing of S1509 is executed, the flow shifts to the processing of S1510.

  In the process of S1510, it is determined whether the addition command reception flag 223y is on (S1510). It is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223q is 0 (S1511). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223q is 0 (S1511: Yes), the display effect content is determined based on the added information received based on the set background mode (S1512). ). Thereafter, a display addition command is set based on the set display effect contents (S1513).

  Here, in the process of S1512, the display effect content corresponding to the information indicated by the received addition command and the set background mode is selected and set. This display content is set in the variation pattern selection table 222a. Specifically, when the variation pattern of the special symbol 1 is out of the validity / non-permission determination result, the number of suspended items is 2, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 160, as shown in FIG. 110 outputs “A1B4” as a variation pattern command and “B0B2” as an addition command. The sound lamp control device 113 determines a display mode in a fixed time corresponding to each background mode based on the fluctuation pattern command, and outputs a command to the display control device 114. Then, after the SW valid time has elapsed, the display control unit 114 outputs only the display mode corresponding to the set background mode to the display control device 114 so as to be set at the start of the addition time.

  In the above-described example, when the underwater background mode is selected when the SW effective time becomes 0, the fluctuation display mode after the reach display mode of the super-reach deviation fluctuation pattern A1 (after the addition time) is set. . In detail, as shown in FIG. 18, a chance effect (see FIG. 13A) is set. When the beach background mode is selected, a display mode after the reach display mode of the super-reach deviation variation pattern A2 is set. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, a continuous effect (see FIG. 13B) is set.

  With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the process of setting data and the like necessary for starting the change of the special symbol set at the start of the change. Furthermore, even when it is necessary to set different display modes corresponding to a plurality of background modes, display data corresponding to each background mode is set for a period including a time during which a player can switch. In the subsequent period, the display data corresponding to the set background mode may be set, so that the control processing required for the special symbol change display can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the prefetch effect selection process (S1313), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the prefetching effect selection process (S1313). In the pre-reading effect selection process (FIG. 55, S1313), a process for selecting (deciding) a preview effect display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the pre-reading result of the ordinary symbol and the special symbol is executed.

  In the look-ahead effect selection process (FIG. 55, S1313), first, it is determined whether or not a look-ahead effect of a normal symbol is set (S1601). The determination as to whether or not the pre-reading effect of the ordinary symbol is set is performed by determining whether the pre-reading effect is selected and during the display period. It should be noted that a dedicated flag is set, the flag is set to ON based on the selection of the prefetch effect, and controlled to be turned off when the display of the prefetch effect is completed, and the prefetch is performed. You may comprise so that it may determine whether the effect was set.

  In the processing of S1601, if it is determined that the prefetching effect of the ordinary symbol has been set (S1601: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the prefetching effect of the normal symbol is not set (S1601: No), it is determined whether the holding of the normal symbol that will be a long time is stored in the normal winning information storage area 223g (S1602). . When it is determined that the holding of the ordinary symbol that will be a long time is stored in the ordinary winning information storage area 223g (S1602: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of the long opening effect (S1603).

  The long-time opening effect refers to a pattern in which the door shown in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 is opened as shown in FIG. This is an announcement effect that is displayed and notifies in advance that the electric accessory 64c will be opened for a long time. The timing to start the long-time opening effect is usually three seconds before the symbol is stopped and displayed for a long time. In this way, by displaying the opening effect for a long time from three seconds before the long hit, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the opening of the electric accessory 64c. Thus, it is possible to prevent the opportunity to easily enter the second starting port 64b from being missed. In addition, the player can play the game with the expectation that the opening effect will be performed for a long time, and can prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the process of S1603, if it is determined that it is not time to execute the long-term opening effect (S1603: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is time to execute the long-time opening effect (S1603: Yes), the start of the opening effect is set (S1604). A display opening effect command for instructing the display control device 114 to display the long opening effect shown in FIGS. 5A to 6A on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S1605). .

  On the other hand, in the process of S1602, when it is determined that the holding of the ordinary symbol that will be a long time is not stored in the ordinary winning information storage area 223g (S1602: No), it is determined whether it is the pre-reading effect executable period. (S1606). Here, the pre-reading effect executable period is a period in which the opening effect is not being executed for a long time and the jackpot game state is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the prefetching effect executable period is set as described above, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be set as appropriate.

  In the process of S1606, if it is determined that the period is not the pre-reading effect executable period (S1606: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the pre-reading effect executable period (S1606: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is stored or not, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter. 223b, it is determined based on the value of the ordinary reserved ball number counter 223c (S1607). If it is determined that the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is not held (S1607: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is held (S1607: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired, and the prefetch effect is executed from the prefetch effect lottery table 222c (see FIG. 24B). A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform (S1608). Here, in the pre-reading effect lottery table 222c (FIG. 24 (b)), when a reserved ball with a big hit is stored in the reserved ball with the special symbol, the reserved ball with a big hit is stored in the reserved ball with the special symbol. The probability that the lottery will be determined to have a pre-reading effect is set higher than in the case where there is no pending ball with no special symbol (special figure). Therefore, the player can predict in advance the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is appropriate, based on the frequency of execution of the prefetching effect. Therefore, the player can enjoy not only the content of the pre-reading effect but also determining the frequency.

  It is determined whether or not the lottery result in S1608 indicates a prefetch effect (S1609). If it is determined that the lottery result does not include prefetching (S1609: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result indicates that there is a prefetch effect (S1609: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired, and the value is obtained from the prefetch effect selection table 222d (see FIGS. 24C to 24D). A prefetch effect is selected (S1610). A display look-ahead effect command indicating the selected look-ahead effect is set (S1611).

  Here, the look-ahead effect selection table 222d includes only a look-ahead effect lottery table (FIG. 24C) for selecting a look-ahead effect when there is a reserved ball of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 and a normal symbol hold. In this case, a look-ahead effect lottery table (FIG. 24D) for selecting a look-ahead effect is provided. In the case where there is a reserved ball with a special symbol, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), the door displayed on the third symbol display device 81 showing a precursor (notice) of whether or not the prefetch effect is to be executed is performed. The number of small shaking effects is set, and then the door is opened and a comment is displayed in it. This comment is a notice display mode for letting the player predict the lottery result of the special symbol holding ball, and indicates that the lottery result is a hit (big hit), "Yeah!" And "Congratulations!" , And characters such as “Chance !!” and “Large Chance !!” that are easier to select than in the case of a hit or a miss are selected based on the value of the staging counter 223k. Have been.

  With such a configuration, the player can predict or determine the result of the special symbol lottery in advance in the comment display displayed when the door is opened. Therefore, even if the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed in the variation display mode on the third symbol display device 81 has a low degree of expectation to the jackpot, it can be enjoyed with the content displayed by the look-ahead effect, and the game can be quickly performed. You can prevent getting tired.

  In addition, when there is no special symbol reservation (when only a normal symbol is reserved), as shown in FIG. 24 (d), only the vibration effect of the door is selected. In addition, when a long-time opening effect is executed, an effect of two door vibrations is executed. Therefore, when the effect of the two door vibrations is selected, the player expects that the door will be opened and the open effect will be executed for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to increase opportunities for giving a player a sense of expectation for a long-time open effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), the effect of opening the door is always executed and the comment is displayed whenever the effect of the door vibration is executed three or more times. If the door shakes continuously, it counts the number of times and expects the door to open. In addition, when the door vibration is performed four times, since it is configured to be performed only when the reserved ball that makes a big hit is stored in the reserved ball of the special symbol, the player performs the door vibration four times. By being executed, a jackpot can be predicted at an early stage. Further, when the door quake is executed, the player can be expected to quake four times, and can give the player an uplifting sensation (a throbbing sensation).

  Next, the synchronous effect management process (S1314), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the synchronous effect management process (S1314). In the synchronous effect management process (S1314), a process of acquiring time information from the RTC 292, determining whether a preparation period or a time effect period is based on the time information, and setting an effect mode indicating the time period is performed. Execute.

  In the synchronous effect management process (S1314 in FIG. 56), first, it is determined whether the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON (S1701). If it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223m is off (S1701: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223m is on (S1701: Yes), the time information of "hour, minute" is obtained from the RTC 292 (S1702). It is determined whether the preparation period flag 223o indicating that the preparation period is being performed is on (S1703). If it is determined that the preparation period flag 223o is ON (S1703: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the processing of S1702 is the time effect period set in the set time storage area 223n (S1704). ). If it is determined that it is not the time effect period (S1704: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the time effect period (S1704: Yes), the preparation period flag 223o is set to off (S1705). The start period flag 223p is set to ON (S1706). The effect mode C is set in the effect mode storage area 223w (S1707). Thereafter, the effect variation processing is executed (S1708), and this processing ends.

  Here, the effect change processing (S1708) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the effect change processing (S1708). In this effect change process (FIG. 57, S1708), the special fish school is displayed in the third symbol display if the result of the pass / fail judgment is a hit for the changing special symbol triggered by the transition from the preparation period to the time effect period. This is a process for executing a process of displaying on the device 81 and informing in advance that it is a big hit. Here, the special fish school is an announcement effect display in which red fish swim in a school from right to left in the third symbol display device 81. Note that the normal announcement effect display of a school of fish is constituted by blue fish and informs the player that the jackpot is highly expected.

  In the effect change processing (FIG. 57, S1708), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is changing (S1721). When it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S1721: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is fluctuating (S1721: Yes), it is determined whether the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating is a big hit (S1722). When it is determined that the result of the determination of the success or failure of the changing special symbol is a big hit (S1722: Yes), a display notice display command for displaying a special school of fish is set (S1723). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1722 that the result of the determination is incorrect (S1722: No), the process ends.

  As described above, in the case where the transition from the preparation period to the time effect start period is made, the result of the determination as to whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating is notified in advance by the special fish school, so that the time effect period is reached, A notice effect display that is advantageous to the user can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the time production period is a period advantageous to the player, and it is possible to play the game while enjoying the time production period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the transition from the preparation period to the time production period is configured to notify the success / failure determination in advance.However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a big hit, the determination result is reported. Alternatively, it may be configured to execute a process of switching so as to always stop and display the symbol that notifies the big hit B. Then, during the jackpot game executed during the time effect period, an effect of determining whether or not the jackpot type is the jackpot A may be executed. With this configuration, a special effect can be provided to the player even if the time effect period becomes a jackpot game, and the player can be more enjoyed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a description will be given of the held number display update process (S1306), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the held number display update process (S1306).

  In the reserved number display update process (FIG. 58, S1306), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols has changed (S1801). If it is determined that there is no change in the reserved symbol (S1801: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a change in the number of reserved symbols (S1801: Yes), it is determined whether there is a reserved ball of the special symbol 2 for which the opening effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1802). When it is determined that there is a reserved ball of the special symbol 2 for which the opening effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1802: Yes), the corresponding special reserved symbol (in the present embodiment, a star-shaped reserved symbol) and others A display hold command indicating a hold symbol of (a hold ball other than the open effect flag 223i being on) is set (S1803). On the other hand, in the processing of S1802, when all of the opening effect flags 223i are off (S1802: No), the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are set. Based on this, a display hold command indicating a hold symbol to be displayed is set (S1804).

  As described above, by determining whether there is a reserved ball for which the opening effect flag 223i is set to ON, the reserved symbol of the reserved ball can be changed to a special symbol different from the normal symbol and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the pending ball has won the second starting port 64b for a long time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a description will be given of the frame button input monitoring / producing process (S1307), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307).

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307 in FIG. 59), first, it is determined whether the apparatus is in a standby state in which a demonstration screen is displayed (S1901). If it is determined that it is in the standby state (S1901: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (operated) (S1902). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1902: Yes), it is determined whether the setting of the setting switch 291 is “1” or “2” (S1903). When the setting switch 291 determines that the setting is “1” or “2” (S1903: Yes), the display variation for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation count indicated by the value of the variation counter 223u. A number command is set (S1904). After that, the processing of S1905 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that the mobile phone is not in the standby state (S1901: No), the process of S1905 is executed.

  In the process of S1905, a sensor input process is executed (S1905). Here, the sensor input processing (S1905) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a sensor input process (S1905), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / producing process (FIG. 59, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the sensor input process (FIG. 60, S1905), first, it is determined whether or not the sensor valid time counter 223r is set to a value larger than 0 (S1921). When it is determined that the sensor valid time counter 223r is equal to or less than 0 (S1921: No), it is determined whether or not the notice effect display is set (S1922). If it is determined that the notice effect display has been set (S1922: Yes), the sensor valid time set as the notice effect display is set in the sensor valid time counter 223r (S1923). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1922 that the announcement effect display has not been set (S1922: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1921, if it is determined that the sensor valid time counter 223r is greater than 0 (S1921: Yes), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223r is updated by subtracting the elapsed time (S1924). ). It is determined whether or not the touch sensor 290 is on, that is, whether or not the player has operated the touch sensor 290 with his / her hand approaching (S1925). If it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (S1925: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the sensor valid time counter 223r is 10 seconds or more (S1926). When it is determined that the value of the sensor valid time counter 223r is equal to or longer than 10 seconds (S1926: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (during the time effect period) (S1927). If it is determined that the mode is the effect mode C (S1927: Yes), the process of S1928 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode is an effect mode other than the effect mode C (S1927: No), the process ends.

  In the process of S1926, when it is determined that the sensor valid time counter 223r is 10 seconds or less (S1926: No), the process of S1928 is executed. In the process of S1928, the value of the touch counter 223s is updated by incrementing the value by one (S1928), and a display notice display command corresponding to the updated value of the touch counter 223s is set (S1929). It is determined whether the value of the touch counter 223s is the upper limit set in the selected touch announcement effect display (S1930). When it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223s is the upper limit (S1930: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223s is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1931). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223s is not the upper limit value (S1930: No), the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 59, the description will be continued. After the sensor input process (S1905) is performed, it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223q is greater than 0, that is, whether the SW valid time is in progress (S1906). When the SW valid time counter 223q is equal to or less than 0, that is, when it is determined that the SW valid time is not being performed (S1906: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S1907). If it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S1907: No), the process of S1914 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is changing, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1908).

  In the processing of S1908, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1908: No), the value of the SW number counter 223v is incremented by 1 (S1909). The value of the sensor valid time counter 223r is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1910). Thereafter, it is determined whether the SW number counter 223v is larger than the upper limit (S1911). If it is determined that the value of the SW number counter 223v is equal to or smaller than the upper limit value (S1911: No), the process of S1914 is executed.

  When it is determined that the value of the SW number counter 223v is larger than the upper limit (S1911: Yes), a special effect lottery is executed (S1912). A display announcement display command indicating an announcement effect determined by lottery is set (S1913). After that, the processing shifts to the processing of S1914. In the process of S1914, it is determined whether a new fluctuation pattern has been set (S1914). If it is determined that a new fluctuation pattern has been set (S1914: Yes), the SW valid time is set in the SW valid time counter 223q based on the set fluctuation pattern (S1915). On the other hand, if it is determined in S1914 that a new fluctuation pattern has not been set (S1914: No), this process ends.

  In the processing of S1906, when it is determined that the SW valid time counter 223q is a value greater than 0 (S1906: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223q is updated by subtracting the value corresponding to the elapsed time. (S1916). Thereafter, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1917). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1917: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1917: Yes), it is determined whether the preparation period flag 223o is on (S1918).

  In the process of S1918, if it is determined that the preparation period flag 223o is ON (S1918: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the preparation period flag 223o is off (S1918: No), the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223t (S1919). A display switching command for a variation pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set (S1920). Then, this process ends.

<Control processing in display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great deal of time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required to start up the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 performs various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is used. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). Accordingly, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs being transferred are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2103). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 61) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S2002 in FIG. 61) (S2105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S2001) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 62, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2102. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, sets the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. After the processing is repeated a plurality of times including the processing of S2102, the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed.

  Thereby, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set in the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed by detecting the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S2003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). The transfer instruction includes a start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, a data size of the image data, information of a transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller reads the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S2004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 71A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S3402 in FIG. 71A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 63 (b)), the simple command such that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 11 is drawn. A determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 63B) and a simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 63B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning prize) in the first starting port 64a, and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device. If it is through 113, that is, if a display fluctuation pattern command is received, a power-on fluctuation image (not shown) can be displayed immediately during the fluctuation effect period to perform a simple fluctuation effect. it can. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the transfer takes a long time, and therefore, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on after power-on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S2005, interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S2006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 31) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 63B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2303), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when receiving a continuous advance command (not shown) from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is also notified of the continuous advance. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S2305) are used. Then, the drawing list shown in FIG. 31 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As the counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type counter corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter. Then, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display a power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S2308) is performed, and then a simple display setting process (S2309) is performed, and the process of S2304 is performed. Move to.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process (FIG. 64, S2302), as shown in FIG. 64, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401). (S2401: No), the command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402). The command type of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), and returns to the process of S2401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 65A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, it is determined whether the received variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a plurality of background modes are set (S2501). A plurality of background modes are set in the variation pattern selected in the effect mode A, and only one type of background mode is set in the variation patterns selected in the effect mode B and the effect mode C. .

  In the present embodiment, in the effect mode B and the effect mode C, one background mode is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of background modes may be set similarly to the effect mode A.

  In the process of S2501, if it is determined that the received variation pattern is a variation pattern for which a plurality of background modes are not set (S2501: No), a display data table corresponding to the command is determined, and the display data table is determined. A buffer is set (S2502). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2501 that the received variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a plurality of background modes are set (S2501: Yes), a display data table corresponding to each background mode is determined. Is set in the display data table buffer (S2503). The display data table corresponding to the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 233k is set to be active (S2504). After that, the process of S2505 is executed.

  Here, the display data table buffer 233d is configured so that a plurality of display data tables can be set, and the set display data tables can be moved in synchronization with the pointers and processed. Therefore, even when different displays are executed corresponding to a plurality of background modes, it is possible to switch to a plurality of display contents by setting one of the plurality of display data table buffers to active and switching.

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. To prepare for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed in the display data table buffer. 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2502 or S2503 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2505). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the set variation display data table is turned on, and the other variation display data tables are changed. The corresponding data table determination flag is set to off (S2506). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2506, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2507), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. Initialization is performed (S2508). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2509), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f is updated from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2508. The drawing content specified at the indicated address is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the content set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S2505. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table, and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area of the normal video RAM 236. To be transferred to 236a, and controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2507, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a display variation type command (S2406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (before the big hit A and the big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2601), and the stop type table and the V interrupt processing are determined. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set by comparing the value of the stop type counter updated each time (see FIG. 63 (b)) is executed. (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to off (S2603). Thereafter, the flow returns to the process of S2401 in FIG.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602. In the above-described task process (S2304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Referring back to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. In the process of S2406, when it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display notice display command among the unprocessed commands (S2408). If it is determined that the display notice display command has been received (S2408: Yes), a notice effect display process is executed (S2409). The details of the preview effect display process (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (a), but the degree of expectation to the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special symbol fluctuation display. And setting a notice display mode for notifying the player of a notice of a big hit or the like.

  Here, the notice effect display process (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66A is a flowchart showing the notice effect display processing (S2409).

  In the notice effect display processing (FIG. 66A, S2409), first, a display data table corresponding to the received display notice display command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S2701). A transfer data table corresponding to the set notice display data table to be displayed at the display timing based on the notice display time indicated by the received notice notice display command is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S2702).

  Next, the data table determination flag is set to ON (S2703), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is counted. The counter 233h is set (S2704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2705).

  As described above, the notice display is set based on the display notice display command output from the audio lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if it were different display modes.

  In the present embodiment, the content of the notice display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the notice display is selected by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. May be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for the advance notice is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table which has already been set may be set to the notice display and overwritten. Good.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2408 that there is no display advance notice display command, it is determined whether there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (S2410). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (S2410: Yes), a mode switching process is executed (S2411). The mode switching process (S2410) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 66B. However, based on the operation of the frame button 22, a process of switching to a display mode corresponding to the background mode is executed.

  Here, the mode switching processing will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (b) (S2411). FIG. 66B is a flowchart showing the mode switching processing (S2411). In the mode switching processing (S2411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode storage area 233k (S2801). It is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S2802). When it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S2802: Yes), the display data table buffer of the background mode corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is set to active (S2803). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S2802: No), the background data is changed and set to the background data corresponding to the received command (S2804).

  As described above, when the special symbol is changing, the display mode is switched to the display mode of the change pattern corresponding to the background mode. On the other hand, if the special symbol is stopped, the background of the display state in the standby state is set to be displayed with the set background.

  The processing for changing the background or the like corresponding to the background mode may be configured as follows.

  The back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the back on state is set to on. Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each of the back image types (back A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off, the back image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the set rear image change flag is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the set rear image determination flag. When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing, if it is specified to display any of the back surfaces A to C according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag that has been set at that time is used. The type of the rear image to be displayed is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video) storing the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is specified. RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a command. When it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command may be turned on or later. The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the received back image command may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2410, when it is determined that there is no display switching command (S2410: No), it is determined whether there is a display addition command (S2412). If it is determined that there is a display addition command (S2412: Yes), an addition command process is executed (S2413).

  Here, the addition command processing (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this addition command processing (S2413).

  In the addition command processing (FIG. 67, S2413), first, the display data table of the display effect corresponding to the received command is determined, and is set by adding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer (S2901). ). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently set to be active). You. The position to be added is set before the END data.

  The changing design information is set in the set display data table (S2902). As described above, by setting the changing symbol information, it is possible to suppress a problem that a symbol different from the displayed symbol is displayed when switching to the display content corresponding to the addition time.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and added to the transfer data table buffer 233e and set (S2903). The time data is added to the time counter 233h based on the data table and set (S2904).

  When the addition command is received, the display mode of the variation pattern set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the addition command, the set variation pattern, and the background mode. , Set the display data table. With this configuration, even when it is necessary to switch different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode corresponding to the set background mode may be set for the display mode after the addition time. The control load on the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is set in addition to the set display data table. However, a new display data table may be set.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2412, if it is determined that there is no display addition command (S2412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2417). If it is (S2417: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2418), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2418) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3001). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S3002), and the error command is set. The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S3001, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S3002 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S3002, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2417 that there is no error command (S2417: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2419), and the processing returns to S2401.

  In the processing of S2401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S2402 to S2419 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S2401 to S2419 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S2401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 63B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 11, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the type commands are extracted, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 65 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 65 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. For the command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 65A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 69, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3101). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3101: No), In the previously executed command determination processing, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the processing of S3102 to S3104 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3105. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3101: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S3102), and then S3103 to S3104. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3103, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S3103). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3103: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3104).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 70A is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3201).

  In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed for each sprite. Determine necessary parameters.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3201, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3202), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3104) or in the process of S3103, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3103: No), then the process proceeds to S3105.

  In S3105, a pointer update process is performed (S3105). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70B is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In the pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3301). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3301, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3302). As a result, if it is the End information (S3302: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3303). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3303: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3304), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3305), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3303, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3303: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3306), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3302: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3106). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3106 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3107), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3108). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3108: No), the display setting processing is ended and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3108: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S3109).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is OFF (S3109: No), the effect of the confirmed display has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3110), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3111). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3112), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3113). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3114), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3115), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set in the process of S3115 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2304), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S3115 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3109, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (S3109: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S3116). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3116: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (S3117), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3118). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3119). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3120), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3121), and the process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  In the process of S3116, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3116: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 63B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. A process of setting a display data table defining that the image (not shown) is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 71A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3401). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3401: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3402), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3401, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3401: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3403), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3402), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3402).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S3501). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S3501: Yes) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S3502). In the process of S3502, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3502 (S3502: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3502: Yes), the process proceeds to S3503. Also, as a result of the process of S3501, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3501: No), the process proceeds to S3503.

  In the processing of S3503, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3503). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3504), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3503, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S3503: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3505), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 63 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. 63 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 63 (b)). Since the determination processing (see FIGS. 64 to 68) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 69 to 70 (b)) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set, and the third symbol display device is set. A normal image is displayed at 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72) (see S3401: No in FIG. 71A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3403), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting processing (S3403).

  In the normal image transfer setting processing, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update processing (S3105) of the previously executed display setting processing (S2303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S3601). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3602). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S3602: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3603) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3604), and the processing shifts to S3605.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3602: No), the process of S3603 and S3604 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3605. In the processing of S3605, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S3605), and the transfer instruction is set. If it has been (S3605: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3606).

  In the process of S3606, after setting a transfer instruction of image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3606 (S3606: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3606: Yes), the process proceeds to S3607. Also, as a result of the processing in S3605, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing has been completed (S3605: No), the processing shifts to S3607.

  In the process of S3607, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3607). If the transfer start flag is on (S3607: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S3608), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various types of information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S3603 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3609. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3607: No), the process ends.

  In the process of S3609, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3609). The determination in the process of S3609 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3609 (S3609: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3609, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3609: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3610). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S3610, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3611), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the same image storage area 236a This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When the indicated stop type information is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, details of the above-described drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information The drawing list shown in FIG. 31 is generated from the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2305) (S3701). That is, in the processing of S3701, the type of storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3702). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image rendered on one frame buffer is developed, so that the rendering process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3702, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3703). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 63B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but alternatively, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, and when the command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. The command to be performed is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

  In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (ie, in use). ) May be provided in the image controller 237 so that the MPU 231 checks the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and the state of the resident It may be checked whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when ending the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 checks the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies the image controller 237 whether the scanning is in the blank period. When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. Thus, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 to determine whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  In this case, in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the information exists, the process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring the image data to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since the image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. The image data not required to reside in the resident video RAM 235 can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Note that the process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a main process loop executed by the MPU 231. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the display control device 114 does not perform important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing, and Can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage the respective video RAMs using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In a given address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM and each video RAM may be managed. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when specifying the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, it is sufficient to simply specify the address set in the common address system. The configuration of the instruction for performing the designation can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected between the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 237 may be directly connected. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is by the NAND flash memory 234a. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Note that even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low readout speed, but by using the configuration described in the above embodiment of the display control device 114, an image can be displayed at a desired display time without any problem. be able to.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The present invention is not limited to this. A first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. May be stored in the boot program. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium that can perform a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored in an internal bus (bus line 240). , A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided therein. May store a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, it is determined whether the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Since the character ROM 234 is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be.

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified for the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b determines that the address is specified by the first program storage area 234d1. Alternatively, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from and read out to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thus, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. (Line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to directly connect the resident video RAM 235, the resident video can be connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, each having image data corresponding to an image corresponding to various modes, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the character ROM 234 while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn. The process of writing the image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the possibility that drawing processing is delayed due to writing of image data can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM may be used as a resident area and a normal area. The area may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write processing. It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

  The type of the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other external input, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is made resident. Preferably, it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten during power-on and the contents thereof are continuously held has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from the user, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion. Good. In this case, while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept stored in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave. Also, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and reads the read image data into the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during the unused period (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer instruction). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and is transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not being used (that is, during a period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three symbol display device 81. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 receiving the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read out image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal at the time of power failure is stored. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, before starting the transfer of the main image data at the time of power supply from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the RAM determination value is checked. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. May be configured. In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the MPU 231 starts execution of the display main process or the main process, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. In this case, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to reduce the time required to recover from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to an instantaneous stop or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be reduced, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently, and may be configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) that exchanges many data signals is provided. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the data transfer.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period (blank period) during which a blank area, which is a scanning area other than the display area where an actual image is displayed, is scanned (blank period). The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. Thus, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. You may comprise. Further, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while one area stores the image data read from the character ROM 234, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. And the time required for the processing can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. can do. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are turned on. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on. As a result, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the power-on image from the character ROM 234 while displaying the power-on image. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying the main image, the reading of the image data from the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation of the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. Although the case of transferring the image data to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the power-on main image and the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image, the resident video RAM 235 is used. , The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a back image change command or a frame button operation command is generated by the audio lamp control device 113, and the back image change command or the frame button operation command is generated by the display control device 114. The case has been described where the back image or the super-reach effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed based on the operation command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with a change in the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. This allows the display control device 114 to change the back image or the super-reach effect mode according to the game state based on the back image change command or the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image or the super-reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the combined data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image data of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and transmits an error command for notifying the error to the display control device 114. You may.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 69). The warning image setting process (see FIG. 70 (a)) may be executed when determining that the warning image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In this case, since the transmission and reception of the error command from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 are not required, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described. Is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the ball from being changed by the magnetic field of the magnet and intentionally entering the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command notifying an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When the display control device 113 receives an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, when the display control device 114 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 Alternatively, the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and turning on the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error. Thereby, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image which notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used as the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, an error message image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to immediately notify the magnetic field error. Can be deterred.

  When the additional data table or the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change a part or all of the color tones in one effect, the additional data table or the display data table uses the 1st symbol in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the type of the sprite after the change in the sprite are associated with the address corresponding to the address in which the time during which the image for the frame is displayed (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is defined as one unit. Color information specifying a color tone may be defined. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of the sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the changed color tone in the sprite. When the color information is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the additional drawing content in the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  When the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying an image to be displayed in one effect is defined by a display data table, the display data table includes an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed in correspondence with an address expressed as a unit (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds), and at that time, a sprite type to be replaced, a sprite type to be newly displayed, and a new sprite type to be displayed. The drawing information of the sprite to be displayed may be defined. Then, in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 stores, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list instead of the sprite to be replaced. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table includes transfer data information of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be specified together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. When the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. May be configured.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used in the drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used in accordance with the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing image drawing based on the additional drawing content. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, The case where only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is described has been described.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach may be added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in an additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined not only to include the additional drawing content but also to include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the additional drawing content. Good. With this, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed by using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering, so that the additional data table and the additional transfer data table can be specified. In comparison with the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified, the load of the processing required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "change start-up", "high-speed change", "announcement effect", "normal reach", and "super reach". After specifying the elements required for the fluctuation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the specified fluctuation effect are combined into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, a display common to each of the fluctuation patterns is performed for “change start”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like. Therefore, by making the fluctuation effects into elements and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, a case will be described in which the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of an image for one frame for which the rendering process is completed (in the above embodiment, every 20 milliseconds). However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that an image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By transmitting, the time interval can be maintained accurately without timing.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer on which the rendered image is to be rendered based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information developed first from the other frame buffer. Has been described, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list, May be alternately selected, the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer, and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits one frame of image information to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller 237 outputs a frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81. Frame buffer to be replaced.

  In the above embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 transmits the sound display control device 113 via the sound lamp controller 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, this may be configured so that the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, until one of the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113, the final display effect is performed. Each time the process is completed, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue to display the final display effect until a fluctuation pattern command or a demo command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change the back image and stop and display the third symbol including the main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first stores the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b and displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. Can be immediately confirmed that the operation has started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. , A simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is desirably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the fluctuation display using the power-on fluctuation image can be performed more quickly.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the transfer at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is defined has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents at intervals of 1/30 seconds.

  Also, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated by the sprite type itself, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be specified. The display control device 114 reads out the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Manage the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. It is no longer necessary to manage both the information specifying the character string and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233 instead. In this case, when instructing to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and It is determined whether or not is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When a transfer instruction for image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. It is described whether the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and it is determined whether the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. The sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is necessary, the MPU 231 sends the image data to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to “back A” of the plurality of back images is made to reside in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, image data of a rear image used in a part of the super reach may be made to reside in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the rear image of the super reach having high or expected appearance frequency resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. Times can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data designated by the character string from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The MPU 231 describes information relating to the required sprite type in the table, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally read from the character ROM 234 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the image data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back surface C which is the rear image of the “island stage”, but the color tone of the entire image may change with time. Good. In addition, as the back image, not only the one that scrolls and the color tone changes with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears over time instead of such a back image is displayed. It may move or change.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 uses the information of various counters (special winning random number counter C1 and special winning type counter C2) acquired at the time of the start prize notified to the sound lamp control device 113 in the reserved ball number command. Although the case of including is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and information of various counters (special winning random number counter C1 and special winning type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 by another command. You may be notified.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which, when performing a fluctuation effect, a high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled so fast that the player cannot visually recognize the pattern is displayed. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which one first starting port 64a for starting a special symbol jackpot lottery when a ball has entered is provided in the gaming board 13, but this is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances in which a ball is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started may be arranged on the game board 13. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first entrances, the reserved ball number command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp control device 113 indicates which first entrance is being held. Information may be included. Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 when the fluctuation is started may include information indicating the fluctuation effect held by any of the first entrances. Good. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance port, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first entered ball indicated in the reserved ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the number of retained balls for the first entrance indicated in the variation pattern command is reduced by one, and the first entrance is obtained. The number of reserved balls can be counted every time.

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased, respectively), the reserved ball number command is mainly transmitted. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main control device 110 increases, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Thereby, the number of times that main control device 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the winning in the first starting port 64a and the passage of the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four. The number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of balls to be changed in the variable display based on the winning in the first starting port 64a is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four is changed by the number of the held balls. It may be displayed in an aspect (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81; The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined direction or a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a normal symbol is won for a long time, a game ball wins in the second starting port 64b, and when the special symbol 2 starts to change, the special symbol 1 is used. As described above, the case where the selected variation pattern is variably displayed at the timing of the start of the variation has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol 2 based on winning a long time and winning the second starting opening 64b is started, the third symbol display is performed. The opening display mode is displayed on the device 81, and the special effect of the special symbol 2 (the effect of the variable display of the special symbol 2 based on winning the second starting port 64b for a long time of the normal symbol) is displayed to the player. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the start is notified.

<Display Mode of Pachinko Machine 10 in Second Embodiment>
A display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment and a timing chart thereof will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 74 (a) shows a third symbol display device 81 in a case where a game ball wins in the second starting port 64b opened for a long time during the variable display of the special symbol 1 shown in FIG. 75 (a). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an opening display mode displayed in FIG. First, a timing chart will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 (a) shows that a special symbol 1 is fluctuating when a game ball is won in the second starting port 64b in a state where the normal symbol is won for a long time and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is zero and the second starting port 64b wins. It is the figure which showed the timing chart until the special symbol 2 at the time of (the remaining fluctuation | variation time is 3 seconds or more) starts fluctuation | variation.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), while the special symbol 1 is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, a long time hit of the ordinary symbol is started, and the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 64b in a state where there is no special symbol. 74, the opening display mode shown in FIG. 74A is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for three seconds before the fluctuation is stopped in the changing special symbol 1. When the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds or less, the same processing as that performed when the special symbol 1 described later wins while the fluctuation is stopped is executed. A detailed description of this case will be described with reference to FIG.

  While the opening display mode is displayed for three seconds, the main symbol of the special symbol 1 is reduced and displayed at the upper left of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. After that, the main symbol of the special symbol 1 is stopped and displayed in the usual size, and the main symbol of the special symbol 2 starts to change and display.

  With such a configuration, even if a game ball wins in the second starting port 64b, the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 is not started until the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 is stopped until the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 is stopped. The start time can be easily recognized.

  In addition, by executing the opening effect using the fluctuating time of the special symbol 1, the fluctuating display time of the special symbol 1 can be effectively used.

  Next, referring to FIG. 75 (b), when a normal symbol is won for a long time and a game ball is awarded in the second starting port 64b, the third symbol in a state where the special symbol 1 is not changed. A timing chart of a display mode displayed on the symbol display device 81 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in a state where the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 is stopped (a state where there is no reserved ball of the special symbol 1, the stop timing of the special symbol 1), a game ball is placed in the second starting port 64b. When a winning is made and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is started, the opening display mode as shown in FIG. Is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. Special pattern 2 It is reduced and displayed at the upper left of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. As the opening display mode, The character "CHANCE ZONE START" is displayed to inform the player that the variable display of the special symbol 2 based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 64b for a long time of the normal symbol is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a description will be given of a display data table for an opening effect that is executed when a game ball wins in the second opening 64b for a long time of a normal symbol in the second embodiment. In this display data table, the display mode of the opening effect as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b) is set. The opening effect is stored as moving image data, and the reproduction setting is set in this display data table. Then, the image is set as an image before the background image. The special symbol that is changing is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the winning command receiving process (S1409 in FIG. 53) is changed to the winning command receiving process 2 (S1409 in FIG. 77) with respect to the control process executed by the audio ramp control process 113 described in the first embodiment. Are different. As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 77, a winning command reception process 2 (S1409) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the winning command receiving process 2 (S1409). The winning command receiving process 2 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment (S1409 in FIG. 77) is different from the winning command receiving process of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment (S1409 in FIG. 53) from S1484 to S1489. Has been added. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  When the processing in S1483 is performed, the processing in S1484 is performed. In the processing of S1484, it is determined whether or not the winning command received when the sub long time flag 223h is ON is the first winning ball of the special symbol 2 (S1484). If it is determined that the command is not the winning command of the first reserved ball of the special symbol 2 (S1484: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command is the first winning ball of the special symbol 2 (S1484: Yes), the processing of S1485 is executed. In the processing of S1485, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 is in a variable display (S1485).

  When it is determined that the special symbol 1 is stopped (S1485: No), the processing of S1489 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol 1 is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (S1485: Yes), it is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the special symbol 1 in a fluctuating state is a win (S1486). If it is determined that the result of the determination of the success or failure of the changing special symbol 1 is out of range (S1486: No), the process of S1487 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning / failing determination result of the changing special symbol 1 is a hit (S1486: Yes), this processing is ended. As described above, when the special symbol 1 that is changing is a win, the big hit game is executed thereafter, so that the opening display mode is canceled. Therefore, before the big hit game, the display of the opening display mode indicating that the variable display of the special symbol 2 is started due to the winning of the second starting port 64b based on the long hit of the normal symbol is canceled. Thus, it is possible to prevent a problem that may confuse the player.

  In the processing of S1487, it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds or more (S1487). If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is less than 3 seconds (S1487: Yes), the processing of S1489 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds or more (S1487: Yes), if the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds before the remaining time, as shown in FIG. A display opening effect command for instructing to display the opening display mode is set (S1488).

  In the process of S1489, a display opening effect command for instructing to display the opening display mode shown in FIG. 74B is set based on the change start timing of the special symbol 2. As described above, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 64b due to the long hit of the normal symbol and the special symbol 2 starts to change, the special symbol 1 is changing, and the remaining time is 3 seconds or more. For example, the opening display mode is displayed at a timing three seconds before the remaining time. On the other hand, when the special symbol 1 is stopped or when the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is less than 3 seconds, the opening display mode is changed to the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol 2. Is set to be displayed.

  Therefore, the timing at which the opening display mode is displayed can be determined as appropriate in accordance with the state when the game ball has won the second starting port 64b. Therefore, it is possible to provide a smooth effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the present embodiment, the opening display mode is canceled when the result of the determination of the winning of the changing special symbol 1 is a hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The opening display mode may be set to be displayed at the timing of the start of the change.

<Control Process Executed by Display Control Device 114 in Second Embodiment>
Referring to FIGS. 78 to 79, a control process executed by MPU 231 of display control device 114 in the second embodiment is executed. The control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment is different from the control processing in the first embodiment in that the command determination processing (FIG. 64, S2302) is different from the command determination processing 2 (FIG. 78, S2320). ). Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 78, the command determination process 2 (S2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S2320). The command determination process 2 (S2320 in FIG. 78) in the second embodiment is different from the command determination process (S2302 in FIG. 64) in the first embodiment in that steps S2414 to S2415 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the processing of S2412, when it is determined that the display addition command has not been received (S2412: No), it is determined whether the display general-purpose opening command has been received (S2414). When it is determined that the display general-purpose opening command has been received (S2414: Yes), the general-purpose figure opening process is executed (S2415). On the other hand, if it is determined that the display opening command has not been received (S2414: No), the processing of S2417 is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 79, the general figure opening process which is one of the command determination processes 2 (FIGS. 78 and 2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. (S2415) will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the ordinary figure opening process (S2415).

  In the ordinary figure opening process (FIG. 79), first, the display timing of the opening display mode set in the command is set (S2911). The display timing is set by setting a general-purpose opening flag (not shown) and overwriting the general-purpose-opening display data table set at the timing indicated by the flag.

  The offset data of the symbol is set in the display data table for the ordinary figure opening (S2912). A display data table for general-purpose opening to be set by overwriting the display data table set in the display data table buffer is set (S2913).

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in a case where the symbol is won for a long time of the ordinary symbol, the display of the special symbol 2 based on the prize in the second starting opening 64b is accompanied by a notice effect different from the normal one. The configuration in which the variable display mode is displayed has been described. However, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured so that the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol after a long time hit is set by one time, and the fluctuation time is longer than the normal time. Also in the case where the determination is made consecutively, the second starting port 64b is different in that the configuration is such that a problem that a game ball equal to or larger than a reserved ball wins in the second starting port 64b and becomes an overflow ball. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed configuration is omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different from the electrical configuration according to the first embodiment in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 as shown in FIGS. A normal variation pattern selection table 202d is added, and a normal status storage area 203k is added to the RAM 203. Other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment.

  The normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is a selection table for selecting (deciding) the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. As shown in FIGS. 80 (c) to 80 (d), the normal variation pattern selection table 202d stores a special status corresponding to a normal status value (mode 1 or mode 2) set in a normal status storage area 203k described later. A normal fluctuation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 80 (c)) and a normal fluctuation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80 (d)) are set.

  The normal status storage area 203k provided in the RAM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is a storage area for storing a normal status. Mode 1 and mode 2 are set as the normal status, and mode 1 is set in the normal state. Mode 2 is set based on the fact that the symbol has been won for a long period of time. After the mode 2 is set, the mode 1 is set when the variation of the ordinary symbol is selected once. That is, the ordinary status is a status for enabling a change after winning for a long time to be identified.

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Third Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The difference from the control process in the first embodiment is that the ordinary symbol variation start process (FIG. 38, S608) is changed to the ordinary symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 81, S640). As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 81, a description will be given of the ordinary symbol variation start process 2 (S640) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary symbol variation start process 2 (S640). In the ordinary symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 81, S640) in the third embodiment, each process of S641 to S645 is added to the ordinary symbol variation start process (FIG. 38, S608) in the first embodiment. I have. As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  After the processing of S630, S634, and S635 is performed, the processing of S641 is performed. In the process of S641, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is selected based on the ordinary status stored in the ordinary status storage area 203k (S641). It is determined whether the normal status is mode 2 (S642). If it is determined that the ordinary status is mode 2 (S642: Yes), the ordinary status is set to mode 1 and stored in the ordinary status storage area 203k (S643).

  As described above, after selecting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, it is determined whether the normal status is set to the mode 2 and if the normal status indicates the mode 2 after a long time, the mode Set to 1. Therefore, the first variation of the ordinary symbol per long time of the ordinary symbol is selected from the ordinary variation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80 (d)). In the normal fluctuation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80 (d)), the fluctuation time is set longer than in the normal fluctuation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 80 (c)). The fluctuation time of one subsequent fluctuation can be set longer.

  The fluctuation time set in the normal fluctuation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80 (d)) is set to 70 seconds when the result of the hit determination is a hit (long time hit, normal hit). I have. As a result, when four special symbols are stored in the special symbol 2 and are immediately displayed in a fluctuating manner, if the result of determination as to whether or not the winning / rejection is out of the fluctuating pattern is all out and the longest fluctuating time is selected, the total fluctuating time of 66 seconds However, since a longer fluctuating time is selected, even when the long hit is continuous, the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is not digested, and the game ball wins in the second starting port 64b. However, it is possible to suppress a problem that the ball becomes an overflow ball that does not become a reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, 70 seconds is set as a case where the special symbol 2 is immediately displayed in a fluctuating manner. However, in consideration of the fact that the special symbol 1 is in a fluctuating state, the result of determining whether or not the special symbol 1 is correct is incorrect. It may be configured to be set to 100 seconds or more obtained by adding 30 seconds which is the longest fluctuation time selected in the case of. With such a configuration, it is possible to further prevent the game ball from becoming an overflow ball when the game ball wins in the second starting port 64b. Further, after all the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 have been consumed, the next long hit can be easily established, so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be executed, and the probability of the big hit can be improved.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the configuration has been described in which the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 that has won the first starting port 64a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment has a configuration in which the winning symbol is won in the first starting port 64a and the color of the held symbol displayed when the ball is stored as the held ball is changed according to the result of the hit / fail judgment. This is different from the first embodiment. Note that detailed descriptions of the same processes as those in the first embodiment are omitted.

<Period setting (setting of production mode) in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b), a description will be given of the setting of each period in the normal game period according to the fourth embodiment in the case where a rainbow indicating a jackpot is displayed in a reserved symbol.

  In FIG. 82 (a), the reserved symbol is displayed as a rainbow in the normal period, the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball starts to change in the normal period, stops changing in the preparation period, and then the big hit game is started. 6 is a timing chart showing a process in the case.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), a game ball wins in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b in the normal period and becomes a reserved ball, and the result of the determination as to whether or not the hit is a big hit is obtained by pre-reading. , The reserved symbol is displayed in rainbow color. In this case, if the special symbol is changed first, or if the special symbol is held first, and the high priority of the change start timing is changed, the change is stopped as a holding period. Thereafter, the timing of the start of the fluctuation is reached. When the fluctuation starts, the fluctuation starts in the normal game period as shown in FIG. 82 (a). Then, at the start of the change, it is determined whether the preparation period is set at the time of the stop of the change.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), when it is determined that the fluctuation stops within the preparation period, the setting of the preparation period is set to be canceled at this time. If the player is notified at the start of the change that the jackpot game will be started, this is set in the preparation period, and the background is changed, and the player is not anxious that the jackpot will not be started. Can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to suppress that the winning effect is spoiled by changing the background screen to the background of the preparation period during the change display of the special symbol that becomes a big hit.

  Next, FIG. 82 (b) is a timing chart in a case where the fluctuation starts during the preparation period, is variably displayed over the time effect period, and stops changing during the time effect period. Since the preparation period is not set to the period when the notice display is not selected, at the start of the fluctuation, the notice display displayed in the preparation period is not set, but based on the switch to the time production period, It is set so that a notice effect is displayed. This makes it possible for other players to think that a big hit is likely to occur when the time effect is reached. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is dissatisfied with the fact that the time display dedicated to the jackpot is not displayed as the special announcement display (special fish school) even though the player is recognized as the jackpot at the start of the change. .

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a mode B prohibition flag 223α is stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment. A notice delay flag 223β is added. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The mode B prohibition flag 223α is a flag indicating that setting of the preparation period is prohibited. When the reserved symbol is displayed with the rainbow display color indicating that the winning / failing determination of the special symbol 1 indicated by the reserved symbol is a big hit, when the variation display of the special symbol 1 corresponding to the reserved symbol is stopped and displayed in the preparation period. If it is determined, the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set to ON (FIG. 86, S1553). Although not shown, the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set to off based on the start of the big hit game.

  The notice delay flag 223β is a flag indicating that the notice display mode of the special fish school that informs the player of the big hit in the time effect period is delayed until the start of the opening effect of the big hit game. The notice delay flag 223β is set to ON in S1734 in the effect change process 2 (S1730 in FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, when the time effect period is set, if the result of the determination as to whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating is a big hit, and if the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or less, it is set to ON.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the advance notice being displayed in a state where the remaining fluctuation display is already small. Furthermore, the notice display mode of the special fish school is delayed until the start of the jackpot game, so that the player can be more easily notified of the start of the jackpot game. It can be easily notified that the notice display mode of the school of fish is displayed.

  The notice delay flag 223β is set to off in the processing of S1546 of the opening processing (S1540 in FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113.

<Regarding the control processing by the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that processing that is different from the first embodiment will be described, and detailed description of the same processing will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 84, the command determination process 2 (S1320) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1320). The command determination process 2 (S1320 in FIG. 84) in the fourth embodiment is different from the command determination process (S1311 in FIG. 47) in the first embodiment in that the variation pattern reception process (S1402 in FIG. 48) In the process 2 (S1529), the winning command receiving process (S1409 in FIG. 53) is changed to the winning command receiving process 3 (S1530 in FIG. 84), and the processes of S1539 to S1540 are respectively added.

  In the variation pattern receiving process 2 (S1529), the variation pattern selection process (S1422 in FIG. 49) is different from the variation pattern command receiving process (S1402 in FIG. 48) in the first embodiment. Since only S1428 has been changed, its illustration is omitted.

  Next, a variation pattern selection process 2 (S1428) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1428). The variation pattern selection process 2 (S1428 in FIG. 85) in the fourth embodiment differs from the variation pattern selection process (S1422 in FIG. 49) in the first embodiment in that the processes in S1434 to S1435 are deleted, and a preview selection process is performed. (FIG. 86, S1550) has been added. Other processes are the same as in the first embodiment.

  Next, the notice selection process (S1550), which is one of the processes in the variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 85, S1428), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the notice selection process (S1550).

  In the notice selection process (FIG. 86, S1550), first, it is determined whether or not the color of the reserved symbol of the special symbol that starts to fluctuate is rainbow (S1551). If it is determined that the color of the reserved symbol is a rainbow (S1551: Yes), it is determined whether or not the period in which the change of the special symbol in which the change is started is the preparation period (S1552). When it is determined that the period during which the fluctuation is stopped is the preparation period (S1552: Yes), the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set to ON (S1553). After that, the process of S1554 is executed.

  As described above, when the result of the determination as to whether or not the color of the reserved symbol is a win or a hit (the result of the lottery of the retained ball indicated by the reserved symbol), the timing of the change stop is determined, and if the preliminary period is the preparation period, A mode B prohibition flag 223α indicating that prohibition is set is set to on. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the background image indicating the preparation period is changed to a background image indicating the preparation period before the big hit and the user cannot concentrate on the change display of the special symbol. Further, in the other pachinko machines 10, since the pachinko machine 10 is set in the preparation period, the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is playing is not set in the preparation period, so that it is possible to recognize that the hit / failure determination result is a big hit, You can play with confidence.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1551 that the color of the reserved symbol is not a rainbow (S1551: No), and if it is determined in the processing of S1552 that the period at the time of the fluctuation stop is not the preparation period (S1552: No), The processing of S1554 is executed.

  In the processing of S1554, a notice effect display is selected from the notice selection table A, and the selected notice effect display is set (S1554). Thereafter, a notice effect is selected and set from the touch charge notice selection table (S1555).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a winning command receiving process 3 (FIG. 87, S1530) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the winning command receiving process 3 (S1530). The winning command receiving process 3 (S1530 in FIG. 87) in the fourth embodiment is different from the winning command receiving process in the first embodiment (S1409 in FIG. 53) in that respective processes from S1534 to S1538 are added. . In addition, each process from S1531 to S1533 in the fourth embodiment is the same as each process from S1481 to S1483 in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description is omitted.

  After the processing of S1553 is performed, the processing of S1534 is performed. In the process of S1534, it is determined whether or not the winning command of the special symbol 1 has been received (S1534). If the winning command of the special symbol 1 has been received (S1534: Yes), it is determined whether or not the received winning command is a winning command indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit (S1535). When it is determined that the hit result is a big hit (S1535: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired (S1536).

  It is determined whether the value of the obtained effect counter 223k is any of “0 to 30” (S1537). When it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223k is one of "0 to 30" (S1537: Yes), the color of the corresponding reserved symbol is set to rainbow (S1538).

  Here, as for the color of the reserved symbol, a display reserved command indicating the color and the number of the reserved symbol is generated in the reserved number display updating process (FIG. 46, S1306) and output to the display control device 114. .

  Next, an opening process (S1540) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the opening process (S1540).

  In the opening process (FIG. 88, S1540), first, it is determined whether or not it is 1 minute or less until the time effect start period (S1541). When it is determined that the time is less than 1 minute until the start of the time effect (S1541: Yes), the volume in the jackpot game is set to a low volume (S1542).

  As described above, when the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is received, if the time is less than 1 minute before the time staging period is set, the volume of the jackpot game is set to be low, so that the jackpot game is being performed. Can be made difficult for other players to understand. As will be described later, when the time effect period is set thereafter, the volume of the big hit game is set to the normal volume. Therefore, from other players, it is possible to make it seem that the jackpot game has been started by the time production period, and to make the player think that the jackpot game is easily started in the time production period. Can be.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1541 that there is a time longer than one minute before the time effect period (S1541: No), the processing of S1543 is executed. In the processing of S1543, it is determined whether or not the advance notice delay flag 223β is on (S1543). If it is determined that the notice delay flag 223β is on (S1543: Yes), a notice notice display command for setting a notice display of a special school of fish is set (S1544). A display opening command is set (S1545). The notice delay flag 223β is set to off (S1546). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1543 that the advance notice delay flag 223β is off (S1543: No), the process ends.

  Next, the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1330). In the synchronous effect management process 2 (FIG. 89, S1330) of the fourth embodiment, the processes of S1730 and S1731 are added to the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 56, S1314) of the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  After performing the processing of S1707, the effect change processing 2 (S1730) is performed. This effect change processing 2 (S1730) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the effect change processing 2 (S1730).

  In the effect change processing 2 (FIG. 90, S1730), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (S1731). When it is determined that the special symbol is fluctuating (S1731: Yes), it is determined whether the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating is a big hit (S1732). When it is determined that the hit determination result is a big hit (S1732: Yes), it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or less (S1733).

  If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or less (S1733: Yes), the notice delay flag 223β is set to ON (S1734). After that, this processing ends. on the other hand. In the process of S1733, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 3 seconds (S1733: No), a display notice display command indicating the display of the special school of fish is set (S1735).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1731 that the special symbol is stopped (S1731: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S1732 that the result of the hit / fail determination is out of order (S1732: No), S1736 is executed. Execute the processing of In the processing of S1736, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is being played (S1736). If it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S1736: Yes), the volume setting in the jackpot game is set to the normal volume (S1737). After that, the process of S1735 is executed.

  As described above, when it is determined that a big hit game is being performed when the time effect period is set, the volume setting is set to the normal volume, so that the start of the big hit game is one minute of the setting of the time effect period. If it is within the previous time, the volume is set to low volume, so the volume will be returned to the normal volume, and from other players, the jackpot game has been started based on the time production period set You can make me think. Therefore, it is possible to make other players think that the jackpot game is likely to be started when the time effect period is set, and it is possible to increase the expectation of the time effect period for the jackpot. Therefore, the player can play the game in expectation of the time effect period being set, and can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1736 that the big hit game is not being performed (S1736: No), this processing ends.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the display mode of each mode displayed in the fixed time of each background mode is set based on the fixed time, and then, based on the elapse of the SW effective time, The case where the display mode indicated by the addition command is set corresponding to the set background mode has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the display mode of each background mode displayed for a fixed time is set based on the number of holdings, and thereafter, the display mode is set for an additional time until the fixed time elapses. The first embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a table mode corresponding to each background mode is set. Illustration and description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment, the contents of the special figure 1 variation pattern selection table of the main control device 110 and the sound ramp control device 113 are changed. As shown in FIGS. 91 to 92, in the fifth embodiment, when the addition time is 0 second, the addition command is not set in the first embodiment. Further, the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the change time, the SW effective time, the fixed time, and the addition time of the super-reach big hit change patterns B1 and B2 and the super-reach change pattern B1 and B2 are changed. Other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment. Further, an addition data transfer flag 233m is added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment.

  The addition data transfer flag 233m is a flag for determining whether transfer of display data corresponding to the addition time has started. The addition data transfer flag 233m is turned on in the processing of S2432 of the addition command processing 2 (S2430 in FIG. 99) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment. Also, it is set to off in the process of S2441.

<Regarding Control Process by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  A command determination process 3 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S1340). In the command determination process 3 (S1340 in FIG. 94) in the fifth embodiment, the process in S1560 is added to the command determination process (S1311 in FIG. 47) in the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  After the processing of S1414 is performed, the processing of S1560 is performed. In the processing of S1560, a display addition command for notifying the display control device 114 of information indicated by the received addition command is set (S1560).

  Next, a variable display setting process 2 (S1350) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1350). In the variable display setting process 2 (S1350 in FIG. 95) in the fifth embodiment, the processes in S1510 to S1513 are deleted from the variable display setting process (S1312 in FIG. 54) in the first embodiment. . Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a description will be given of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (FIG. 96, S1360) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S1360). The frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1360 in FIG. 96) in the fifth embodiment is different from the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1307 in FIG. 59) in the first embodiment in that the processing in S1920 is S1940. Processing has been changed.

  After the processing of S1919 is performed, the processing of S1940 is performed. In the processing of S1940, a display background command indicating the set background mode is set (S1940).

<Control Processing by Display Control Device 114 in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a command determination process 3 (S2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S2320). The command determining process 3 (S2320 in FIG. 97) in the fifth embodiment is different from the command determining process (S2302 in FIG. 64) in the first embodiment in that the variable pattern command process (S2405 in FIG. 65) The processing (FIG. 98, S2420) and the addition command processing (FIG. 67, S2413) are changed to addition command processing 2 (FIG. 99, S2430), respectively. For other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  Next, a variation pattern command process 2 (S2420) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern command processing 2 (S2420). The variation pattern command process 2 (FIG. 98, S2420) in the fifth embodiment is different from the variation pattern command process (FIG. 65 (a), S2405) in the first embodiment in that the processes in S2503 and S2504 are S2510, The processing has been changed to S2511. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S2510, the display data table corresponding to the fixed time of each background mode is determined based on the number of hold, and set in the display data table buffer (S2510). The variable display data table corresponding to the background mode stored in the background mode storage area is set to be active (S2511).

  Next, an addition command process 2 (S2430 in FIG. 99) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the addition command processing 2 (S2430).

  In addition command processing 2 (FIG. 99, S2430), first, it is determined whether the addition data transfer flag 233m is on (S2431). If it is determined that the addition data transfer flag 233m is ON (S2431: Yes), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fixed time (S2435). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the fixed time (S2435: Yes), the determined display data table is set in the display data table buffer (S2436). The transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer (S2437). The data table determination flag is set to ON (S2438). The time data is set in the time counter based on the data table (S2439). The pointer is initialized (S2440). The addition data transfer flag 233m is set to off (S2441).

  On the other hand, in the process of S2431, if it is determined that the addition data transfer flag 233m is off (S2341: No), the display data table is determined based on the received command and the variation pattern, and the symbol information is set. (S2432). The transfer of the moving image data set in the display data table is started (S2433). The addition data transfer flag 233m is set to ON (S2434).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the fixed-time variable display, the variable-display data is set for each background mode based on the number of holds, and thereafter, the additional time is used until the fixed time elapses. Since the variable display data to be set is set, the amount of data set at the start of the variable display can be reduced. Therefore, the control load at the start of the fluctuation is reduced, and it is possible to suppress a problem such as a process drop.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an RTC 292 operated by a built-in battery, measures time, and produces an effect of a fluctuation display selected for each time based on the time measurement data. The case of different configurations has been described. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured so that the power supplied from the pachinko machine 10 is also input to the RTC 292, and when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, power is supplied to the RTC 292. It was configured so that: Further, the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the setting switch 291 is configured to be rotatable by a motor so that the setting can be switched by controlling the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in Sixth Embodiment>
The electrical configuration according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 100A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the RTC 292 connected to the audio lamp control device 113. To the RTC 292, a voltage of 5 V from the power supply device 290 is connected to a power input unit via a diode D1. Further, a 5V battery 292a of the RTC 292 is also connected to the power input unit via a predetermined resistor. With this configuration, when a voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115, power is supplied to the RTC 292 from the pachinko machine 10, and when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is off, the battery is not charged. Switching is performed so that necessary power is supplied from the 292a.

  Therefore, the operation time of the battery 292a can be reduced, and power consumption of the battery 292a can be further suppressed. Therefore, the RTC 292 can be operated for a long time.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100B, the setting switch 291 is configured to be rotatable by a switching motor 293 configured by a stepping motor. With this configuration, when the power of the battery 292a of the RTC 292 becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value, the setting switch 291 is rotated to automatically change the setting to prohibit the use of the RTC 292. Therefore, it is possible to save time and effort for setting at the game store as appropriate, and to reduce maintenance work.

  Next, a time setting process 2 (S1230) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the time setting process 2 (S1230 in FIG. 102).

  In the time setting process 2 (FIG. 102, S1230), first, it is determined whether the setting switch 291 is 1 or 3 (S1221). If the setting of the setting switch 291 is 1 or 3, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1222). It is determined whether the acquired time information is within the term data (in the present embodiment, within six years from a predetermined date).

  When it is determined that the acquired time data is within the time limit (S1223: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON (S1224). Based on the acquired time information, a preparation period and a time production period are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223n (S1225).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired time information is not within the time limit data, that is, that six years or more have elapsed (S1223: No), the operation of the switching motor 293 is set so that the setting switch 291 is set to two. It is set (S1226). Here, specifically, the setting switch 291 is set so that the setting is switched one by one every time the setting switch 291 is rotated by 90 degrees. Next, the stepping motor as the switching motor 293 is operated. To switch from setting 3 to setting 2, the stepping motor, which is the switching motor 293, is operated so as to rotate forward by 270 degrees.

  As a result, the setting 2 is set so that the function of the RTC 292 is disabled as shown in FIG. 26B, and the variable display count is switched to the display. Therefore, when six years, which is the expiration date of the battery 292a of the RTC 292, has passed, the function of the RTC 292 is automatically disabled, so that the time production period and the like can be set in a state where the timekeeping data is inaccurate due to insufficient power. It is possible to suppress the problem that the synchronization is not performed with another pachinko machine 10 by being executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting 1 or the setting 3 is set, the setting data is automatically set to the setting 2 by passing the time limit data. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. When the setting is set to 2 and the setting is set to 3, the switching motor 293 may be operated to switch to setting 4, respectively. With this configuration, it is possible to set only the function of the RTC 292 without changing the setting of the display of the total number of changes.

  In addition, in addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the setting switch is changed on the hall side, a retry for resetting to a correct setting (to match the setting using the RTC 292 after 6 years or more) is performed. Processing for causing the switching motor 293 to execute the operation may be added. In this case, it may be configured to always monitor the change of the setting every predetermined time (for example, every hour) or to change the setting and operate immediately. With this configuration, the hall side can easily notice that the expiration date of the RTC 292 has passed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the expiration date is determined on the date when six years have elapsed from the preset setting period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a determination unit for determining the voltage value of the battery 292a is provided. The configuration may be such that the setting switch 291 is automatically switched when the voltage value becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined voltage (for example, 3.3 V or lower). With this configuration, the state of the battery 292a of the RTC 292 can be determined and switched more.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a configuration in which the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a player by a touch switch 290 provided on the upper plate 17 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. did. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the variable display device unit 80 provided on the game board 60 is provided with the board-side touch sensor 294 constituted by an optical touch sensor. The board side touch sensor 294 is provided above the third symbol display device 81, and is provided on the board side left touch sensor 294 a provided on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 and on the board side right side provided on the right side of the pachinko machine 10. And a touch sensor 294b.

  The board-side touch sensor 294a is turned on when the player places his hand on the left side of the main display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 through the glass unit 16, and the board-side left touch sensor 294a is turned on. When the hand is held over the right side of the main display area Dm of the apparatus, the board-side right touch sensor 294b is turned on. As will be described later in detail, the board-side touch sensor 294 moves the hand so as to point the display mode of each card or the like displayed on the left and right sides of the third symbol display device 81 through the glass unit 16 with a finger or the like. You can choose. In addition, by holding the hand over the glass unit 16, one of the board-side left touch sensor 294a and the board-side right touch sensor 294b of the board-side touch sensor 294 is turned on, and as shown in FIG. An effect of moving a school of fish from right to left is performed.

<Display effect using touch sensor according to seventh embodiment>
A display effect using the frame-side touch sensor 290 and the board-side touch sensor 294 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  With reference to FIGS. 104 (a) to 104 (c), a notification of a school of fish charge using the frame side touch sensor 290 and the board side touch sensor 294 will be described. Normally, when the main symbol is in the reach display mode, a school of fish notice display mode in which a school of fish (a school of fish) swims from the right to the left of the third symbol display device 81 is shown in FIG. This is a notice display mode that is easy to be selected when the result of the hit determination is a big hit as set in the selection table A222e (see FIG. 25A). Here, the school of fish charge notice is also configured to be easier to select when the result of the hit determination is a big hit than in the case of a loss. Although illustration is omitted, this fish school charge announcement effect may be set so as to be selected by replacing the fish school announcement with the fish school charge announcement in the announcement selection table A222e (see FIG. 25A).

  When the fish school charge notice is selected as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the main symbol of the special symbol 1 that is changing is reduced and displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81 in a reduced size. Then, the characters "Collect the fish with the touch sensor of the frame! Reach with 5 or more fish!" Are displayed, and the player holds the touch sensor 290 of the frame with his / her hand to turn it on to collect the fish. Then, when the number becomes five or more, a character is displayed informing that a reach is reached.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the player holds his hand over the touch sensor 290 of the frame, a display mode in which fish gather at the right end of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed based on the held time. . When the number of fish becomes five or more, the main symbol is displayed in the reach display mode. In this state, when the user touches the board-side touch sensor 294 (either the board-side left touch sensor 294a or the board-side right touch sensor 294b) to turn it on, the school of fish that has gathered as shown in FIG. The three symbol display devices 81 are variably displayed so as to swim from right to left.

  In this embodiment, when the board-side touch sensor 294 is turned on, the school of fish gathered is displayed in a fluctuating manner from right to left. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , The value of the effect counter 223k may be acquired based on the above, a determination as to whether or not the game is successful may be performed, and when the game is won, the school of fish may be variably displayed from the right to the left of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, if the result of the determination of the success or failure of the special symbol during the change is a hit, it is configured to be easily determined as a hit rather than a loss. The player can be notified.

  In addition, the player can move the fish school in the third symbol display device 81 so as to change and display the school of fish from right to left with his / her hand, so that the board-side touch sensor 294 is turned on. Based on the movement of the hand, it is possible to make it seem as if the school of fish fluctuated and displayed. In addition, by executing a lottery to determine whether or not the fish school is displayed in a variable manner each time the board-side touch sensor 290 is turned on, the player moves his / her hand many times to turn on the board-side touch sensor 294. After being turned on once, the lottery is won and the school of fish is displayed in a variable manner, thereby giving the player unexpectedness.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105, a display mode of a card notice which is a notice effect using the frame-side touch sensor 290 and the board-side touch sensor will be described. In FIG. 105 (a), the card notice is selected, and the special symbol that is changing is reduced and displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81. Two cards are displayed on the left and right, and a triangular cursor is displayed below one of them. In addition, the characters "Move the cursor with your finger to select a card!" Are displayed, and a notification is issued to prompt the player to move the cursor with the finger. Here, the card A displayed in FIG. 105A is located below the board-side left touch sensor 294a, and the card B is located below the board-side right touch sensor 294b.

  Thus, when the card A is pointed through the glass unit 16, the board-side left touch sensor 294a is turned on, and the cursor moves below the card A. on the other hand. When the card B is pointed over the glass unit 16, the board-side right touch sensor 294b is turned on, and the display is controlled so that the cursor moves below the card B.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters "determined by the frame side touch sensor", and turns on the selected card by turning on the frame side touch sensor 290. The card is determined, and as shown in FIG. 105 (b), the selected card is turned over and a message described on the card is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 105 (b), the character “REACH!” That indicates that the special symbol that is changing will be in the reach display mode is displayed.

  In addition, a plurality of the notification contents are set, for example, a "big hit" for notifying that the result of the determination of the special symbol during the change is a big hit, or set to be easily selected in the case of a big hit. , Etc., which inform the player that the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high, is displayed. These characters are selected in advance when the card notice is selected, and the same notice display mode is displayed regardless of whether the card A or the card B is selected. In the card announcement, if the selection of the card is not executed by the player, the display of the card announcement is deleted after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed without displaying the contents of the card.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the card notice is not selected, the content of the card is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the content of the card where the cursor is located is automatically given to the player. You may comprise so that it may be displayed.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, a board-side touch sensor 294 electrically connected to the input / output port of the sound lamp control device 113 is added, and a frame-side time counter is added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. 223 γ and a board-side time counter 223 δ are added. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the board-side touch sensor 294 is provided with transmissive sensors on the left and right facing the glass unit 16 above the center frame 86 of the variable display unit 80. The board-side touch sensor 294 includes a board-side left touch sensor 294a disposed on the upper left side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and a board-side right sensor disposed on the upper right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. And a touch sensor 294b. When the hand on the left side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 over the glass unit 16, the board-side touch sensor 294 turns on, and the hand on the right side of the display area. And the board side right touch sensor 294b is turned on. When the hand is held over the center of the display area, the board-side left touch sensor 294a and the board-side right touch sensor 294b are turned on.

  Next, referring to FIG. 107, a frame-side time counter 223γ of RAM 203 of MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment is a counter for measuring a time during which frame-side touch sensor 290 is turned on. is there. The frame-side time counter 223γ is incremented by 1 in the sensor execution process (S1954 in FIG. 110, S1954) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113.

  The board-side time counter 223δ is a counter for measuring a time during which the board-side touch sensor 294 is turned on. The board-side time counter 223δ is incremented by 1 by the processing of S1974 of the sensor effect processing (FIG. 110, S1954) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment.

<Regarding Control Process by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  With reference to FIG. 108, a description will be given of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1370). The frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (FIG. 108, S1370) in the seventh embodiment is different from the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (FIG. 59, S1307) in the first embodiment in that the sensor input processing (FIG. 60). , S1905) is changed to sensor input processing 2 (FIG. 109, S1950), and special operation processing (FIG. 112, S1960) is added. Other processes are the same as in the first embodiment.

  Next, referring to FIG. 109, one process in the frame button input monitoring and effect process 3 (FIG. 108, S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. A certain sensor input process 2 (S1950) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the sensor input process 2 (S1950).

  In the sensor input process 2 (FIG. 109, S1950), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the sensor valid time counter 223r is greater than 0 (S1951). When it is determined that the value of the sensor valid time counter 223r is 0 (S1951: No), it is determined whether or not a notice effect display using the frame-side touch sensor 290 or the board-side touch sensor 294 is set (S1952). ). When it is determined that the preview effect display using the frame-side touch sensor 290 or the board-side touch sensor 294 is set (S1952: Yes), the frame-side touch sensor 290 or the board set to the preview effect is set. The sensor valid time of the side touch sensor 294 is set in the sensor valid time counter 223r (S1953). On the other hand, if it is determined that the notice effect display using the frame-side touch sensor 290 or the board-side touch sensor 294 has not been set (S1952: No), the process ends. In the process of S1951, when it is determined that the value of the sensor valid time counter 223r is greater than 0 (S1951: Yes), a sensor effect process is executed (S1954).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the details of the sensor effect processing (S1954) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the sensor effect processing (S1954).

  In the sensor effect processing (FIG. 110, S1954), first, is the valid time of the touch sensor 290 on the frame side being in effect, that is, is the value of the sensor valid time counter 223r corresponding to the touch sensor 290 on the frame side being 0? It is determined (S1961). If it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is 0 (S1961: No), the processing of S1969 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the sensor valid time counter 223r corresponding to the frame side touch sensor 290 is greater than 0 (S1961: Yes), the sensor valid time counter corresponding to the frame side touch sensor 290 is determined. 223r is subtracted and updated (S1962). Here, the time corresponding to the elapsed time is subtracted by 1 in the present embodiment.

  It is determined whether the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is on (S1963). If it is determined that the frame-side touch sensor 290 is ON (S1963: Yes), it is determined whether the selected (set) advance notice effect is a card advance effect (S1964). On the other hand, when it is determined that the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is off (S1963: No), the processing of S1969 is executed. If it is determined that the effect is a card announcement effect (S1964: Yes), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223r corresponding to the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1966).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1964, when it is determined that the selected advance effect is not the card advance effect (S1964: No), 1 is added to the frame side time counter 223γ (S1967). The display notice display command corresponding to (shown) the value of the frame side time counter 223γ is set (S1968). When the display control device 114 receives the display notice display command, a display data table for notice corresponding to the value of the frame side time counter 223γ indicated by the display notice display command is set. For example, when the fish school charge notice shown in FIGS. 104A to 104C is selected, display data for displaying fish up to the upper limit of the number of fish set in the fish school charge notice is displayed. The table is set. For example, when a school of fish charge notice in which the upper limit of the number of fish is set to three is selected, each time the value of the frame side time counter 223r increases by one second, the number of fish is increased by one and displayed. The display data table is set so that the number is maintained when the upper limit is three.

  In the processing in S1969, it is determined whether the valid time of the board-side touch sensor 294 is in progress, that is, whether the value of the sensor valid time counter 223r corresponding to the board-side touch sensor 294 is greater than 0 (S1969). If it is determined that the valid time of the board-side touch sensor 294 is not during the valid time (S1969: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the valid time of the board-side touch sensor 294 is during (S1969: Yes), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223r corresponding to the board-side touch sensor 294 is subtracted and updated (S1970). It is determined whether the board side touch sensor 294 is on (S1971). If it is determined that the board-side touch sensor 294 is off (S1971: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the board-side touch sensor 294 is ON (S1971: Yes), it is determined whether the selected advance notice effect is a card advance effect (S1972). If it is determined that the card announcement effect has been selected (S1972: Yes), a sensor selection process is executed (S1973). The sensor selection process (S1973) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 111, but a process for selecting a card is performed in a card announcement effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1972 that the card announcement effect has not been selected (S1972: No), the board-side time counter 223δ is incremented by 1 (S1974). A display notice display command corresponding to the value of the board-side time counter 223δ (indicating the value of the board-side time counter 223δ) is set. Here, the value of the board-side time counter 223δ is reset to 0, which is the initial value, based on the setting of the display notice display command. When receiving the display notice display command, the display control device 114 sets the school of fish to move and display from left to right of the display area (S1975).

  Next, the sensor selection process (S1973) in the sensor effect process (S1954 in FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the sensor selection process (S1973).

  In the sensor selection process (FIG. 111, S1973), first, it is determined whether the board-side right touch sensor 294b is on (S1981). If it is determined that the board-side right touch sensor 294b is on (S1981: Yes), a display command for displaying the cursor on the right side is set (S1982). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1981 that the board-side right touch sensor 294b is off (S1981: No), it is determined whether the board-side left touch sensor 294a is on (S1983). When it is determined that the board-side left touch sensor 294a is on (S1983: Yes), a display command for displaying the cursor on the left side is set (S1984). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1983 that the board-side left touch sensor 294a is off (S1983: No), this processing ends.

  Next, a special operation process (S1960) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the special operation process (S1960). Note that the special operation processing (S1960 in FIG. 112) in the seventh embodiment is the same as the processing in S1907 to S1913 and S1916 in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1307 in FIG. 59) in the first embodiment. Since it is executed, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by performing an effect using a plurality of touch sensors, it is possible to cause the player to perform an operation, and it is possible to suppress boring. In addition, by configuring with a touch sensor, the player can operate the display screen by pointing a finger or the like, and the feeling of participating in the game can be enhanced.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a different type from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, and a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and is not provided with a handle for launching a ball. Things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Also, the configuration of each of the above embodiments may be configured to be combined or implemented in whole or in part.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be described.

<Feature A group>
A ball entry port in which a game ball can enter, and lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information necessary for executing a lottery of a game based on that the game ball has entered the entrance port, and A success / failure determination unit that executes a success / failure determination when the lottery condition is established based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit; and a storage unit that stores the lottery information at least until the lottery condition is satisfied. Display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of pieces of lottery information stored by the storage means; a first state in which a game ball easily enters the entrance, and a game ball more than the first state A ball entry assisting means that can be changed to a second state that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and when the first condition is satisfied, the ball entry assisting means is changed from the second state to the first state. When the first opening and the second condition are satisfied, the first opening is performed. Variable control means for at least changing the ball entry assisting means to a second opening which is changed from the second state to the first state so as to be more advantageous to the player, and When a game ball enters the entrance and the lottery information is stored in the storage means while being changed to 2 open, the number of pieces of lottery information is given to the player by the first number. Display control means capable of causing the display means to display the identification symbol different from the identification symbol due to a game ball entering the entrance while being changed to open. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A1, the lottery information necessary for executing the lottery of the game is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance into which the game ball can enter. . Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, the success / failure determination is executed by the success / failure determination means when the lottery condition is satisfied. At least until the lottery condition is satisfied, the lottery information is stored by the storage unit. An identification symbol capable of identifying the number of pieces of lottery information stored by the storage means is displayed by the display means. The state is changed by the ball entry assisting means into a first state in which the game ball easily enters the entrance and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state. When the first condition is satisfied, the first opening is changed from the second state to the first state, and when the second condition is satisfied, the ball is entered so as to be more advantageous to the player than the first opening. The assisting means is changed from the second state to the first state by the variable control means. When a game ball enters the entrance and the lottery information is stored in the storage means while being changed to the second opening by the variable control means, the number of pieces of lottery information is given to the player. An identification symbol different from the identification symbol obtained when a game ball enters the entrance while being changed to the first opening is displayed on the display means by the display control means. Thereby, it is possible to easily inform the player of the number of game balls that have entered the ball entrance at the second opening and the lottery information has been stored. Therefore, it is easy for the player to understand that the second opening has been performed, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with confidence.

  In the gaming machine A1, in order to determine whether at least the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, based on detection means capable of detecting the passage of the game ball, and that the detection means determines the passage of the game ball. Discriminating information acquiring means for acquiring discriminating information, discriminating means for discriminating whether the first opening or the second opening is established based on the fulfillment of a discriminating condition based on the discriminating information acquired by the acquiring means; A discrimination information storage unit that stores the discrimination information acquired at least until the discrimination condition is satisfied, and discriminates the discrimination information obtained by the discrimination information acquisition unit in advance before the discrimination condition is satisfied. If the preliminary determination means determines that the second opening has been established, the information is given to the player and the ball entry assisting means is changed to the second release. Gaming machine A2, wherein also those having a notification means for notifying before.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detecting means. Based on the determination of the passage of the game ball by the detection means, determination information for determining whether at least the first condition and the second condition are satisfied is obtained by the determination information obtaining means. Based on the determination information obtained by the obtaining unit, the determination unit determines whether the first opening or the second opening is established based on the establishment of the determination condition. The discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means at least until the determination condition is satisfied. Before the determination condition is satisfied, the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined in advance by the preliminary determination means. When the establishment of the second opening is determined by the preliminary determination unit, the information is notified to the player by the notification unit before the ball entry assisting unit is changed to the second opening. Thus, the user can know in advance about the second opening, and can prepare for the second opening. Therefore, there is an effect that the second opening can be effectively used.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the notifying unit is configured to execute the ball entry assisting unit in the first state based on the determination of the establishment of the second opening by the preliminary determining unit. A first notification mode indicating a first state is notified, and a second notification mode indicating a change to the second state is notified based on the change to the second state. Gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A1 and A2. That is, based on the determination of the establishment of the second opening by the preliminary determination unit, the first notification mode indicating the first state is notified by the notification unit until the ball entry assisting unit is in the first state. You. Further, based on the change to the second state, a second notification mode indicating that the state has been changed to the second state is notified by the notifying unit. Thereby, the player can recognize the state of the ball entry assisting means by the notification. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player does not overlook that the entry / exit auxiliary means is in the second open state.

  In the gaming machine A3, the notification means displays a first notification symbol indicating that the ball entry assisting means is in the first state on the display means, as the first notification mode, and the second notification mode A gaming machine A4, wherein a second notification symbol indicating that the ball entry assisting means is in the second state is displayed on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3. That is, as the first notification mode, a first notification symbol indicating that the ball entry assisting means is in the first state is displayed on the display means by the notification means. As a second notification mode, a second notification symbol indicating that the ball entry assisting means is in the second state is displayed on the display means by the notification means. Thus, the player can recognize whether the ball entry assisting means is in the first state or the second state by the display means. Therefore, more information can be obtained from the display means, and there is an effect that the game can be easily performed.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, based on the fact that the establishment of the second opening is determined by the advance determination means, the information is notified by the notification means before the information is notified by the notification means. A gaming machine A5 having a prior notification means for notifying a prior notification mode of notifying that notification is performed.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, based on the fact that the establishment of the second opening is determined by the preliminary determination means, the information is notified by the notification means rather than by the notification means. Since the advance notification mode for notifying that the notification is to be performed by the notification unit is notified by the advance notification unit before, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player misses the fact that the second opening has been performed. .

<Characteristic B group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, a validity determining means for performing a validity determination, a display means for displaying an identification symbol indicating the result of the determination by the validity determination means, and a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol Time counting in a gaming machine having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the determination of winning or failing. The time display means and the time data discriminating means for discriminating the time data by the time means, and when it is determined that the set value is predetermined by the time data discriminating means, the dynamic display mode determining means The dynamic display mode to be determined is different from the other periods. The specific period in which the dynamic display mode is determined, and the preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period, respectively. The dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode, which can be determined outside the specific period by the dynamic display mode determining means, is set in a shorter time than the preparation period. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B1, based on the establishment of the starting condition, the determination as to whether or not the game is performed is performed by the game determination unit. An identification symbol indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed by the display unit. A dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Based on the result of the success / failure determination being a hit, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. Timing data by the timing means capable of timing is determined by the timing data determination means. When it is determined by the timing data determining means that the set value is a predetermined value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit is determined to be different from the other display periods. The specific period and a preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period are set by the effect period setting means. The dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode that can be determined outside the specific period by the dynamic display mode determination means is set to a time shorter than the preparation period. Thus, the dynamic display mode started before the preparation period can be ended in the preparation period before the specific period starts. Therefore, there is an effect that the specific period can be started by preparing for the specific period.

  In the gaming machine B1, the timing unit counts an elapsed time since the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the timing data determination unit determines that the timing data by the timing unit is turned on in the gaming machine. A game machine B2 that, when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed from the time, the value is determined to be the set value.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, the timer means measures the elapsed time from when the power of the gaming machine is turned on by the timer means. When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was supplied to the gaming machine, the timing data by the timing means is determined to be the set value by the timing data determination interruption. Thus, by simultaneously turning on the power to the plurality of gaming machines, the gaming machines can measure the same elapsed time. Therefore, the specific period can be set in synchronization with a plurality of the same gaming machines. Therefore, there is an effect that a dynamic display mode synchronized between gaming machines can be determined.

  In the gaming machine B1, the timing means is configured to be capable of timing the time even when the power of the gaming machine is not turned on, and the timing data discriminating means determines the time obtained by the timing means. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that when it is determined that the data is a predetermined set time, the data is determined to be the set value.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. In other words, even when the power of the gaming machine is not turned on, time counting is performed by the time counting means. When it is determined that the timekeeping data obtained by the timekeeping means is a predetermined set time, it is determined by the timekeeping data determination means that it is a set value. Thus, by setting the same time as the set value in advance between the same gaming machines, the specific period can be set in synchronization between the gaming machines. Therefore, there is an effect that a dynamic display mode synchronized between gaming machines can be determined.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the identification symbol is dynamically displayed, a notice effect executing means for executing a notice effect based on the result of the decision by the decision means, and the notice effect executing means A notice effect to be executed based on the result of the determination of the propriety, a notice effect determining means for determining from among a plurality of notice effects, and a preparation period based on that the preparation period is set by the period setting means. And a prohibiting means for setting so as to prohibit execution of the notice effect in the gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effect is achieved in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3. That is, when the identification symbol is dynamically displayed, a preview effect based on the result of the determination by the determination unit is executed by the announcement effect execution unit. The notice effect performed by the notice effect executing means is determined by the notice effect determining means from among a plurality of notice effects based on the result of the determination. Based on the fact that the preparation period is set by the period setting unit, the prohibition unit is set to prohibit the execution of the announcement effect during the preparation period. Thus, during the preparation period, the announcement effect is not determined, so that an effect different from the normal time can be provided to the player. Therefore, in the preparation period before shifting to the specific period, it is possible to provide the player with an effect different from the normal time, and it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the specific period is about to start. There is.

  In the gaming machine B4, at least a specific advance effect is set in the plurality of advance effects, and the advance effect determination means is easier to determine the specific advance effect in the specific period than outside the specific period. A gaming machine B5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B4. That is, at least a specific notice effect is set for the plurality of notice effects. In the specific period, the specific announcement effect is more easily determined by the announcement effect determination means than outside the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be notified of the specific period by the specific notice effect in an easily understandable manner.

  The gaming machine B6, wherein a plurality of setting values are set in advance in any of the gaming machines B1 to B5.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machines B1 to B5, since a plurality of set values are set in advance, there is an effect that the specific period can be set a plurality of times.

<Characteristic C group>
Based on the establishment of the starting condition, a winning / failing determination unit for performing a winning / falling determination, and when the winning / falling determination unit determines that the winning is a hit, a first hit and a benefit more advantageous to the player than the first hit are given. A hit type determining means for determining at least a second hit, a display means for displaying an identification symbol indicating a result of the determination by the determination means, and a dynamic display mode of the identification symbol displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine comprising: a dynamic display mode determining means for determining; and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to a player when the result of determination is displayed with an identification symbol indicating a hit. A time counting means capable of measuring time, a time counting data discriminating means for discriminating timing data by the time counting means, and a set value determined in advance by the time counting data discrimination. In such a case, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is changed to a specific period in which a dynamic display mode different from other periods is determined, and preparation for starting the specific period before the specific period is performed. A period setting unit for setting a period, and a dynamic display determining unit for determining whether the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display unit when the specific period is set by the period setting unit. And a second hit determining means for determining whether or not the result of the dynamic display is the second hit based on the determination that the dynamic display is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display determining means. And when the second hit determining means determines that the second hit has occurred, notifies the player of a notification mode indicating the second hit before the identification symbol is stopped and displayed. Notification means Gaming machine C1, characterized in that those having.

  According to the gaming machine C1, based on the satisfaction of the starting condition, the determination as to whether or not the game is performed is performed by the game determination unit. When it is determined that the hit is a hit, the first hit and the second hit to which a benefit more advantageous to the player than the first hit is given are determined at least by the hit type determining means. An identification symbol indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed by the display unit. The dynamic display mode of the identification symbol displayed on the display unit is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit. When the result of the determination is displayed in an identification symbol indicating a hit, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. Timing data by the timing means capable of timing is determined by the timing data determination means. When it is determined by the timing data determination that the set value is a predetermined value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is changed to a dynamic display mode different from other periods. A period and a preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period are set by the period setting means. When the specific period is set by the period setting unit, the dynamic display determining unit determines whether the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display unit. Based on the determination that the dynamic display is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display determination unit, the second hit determination unit determines whether the result of the dynamic display correctness determination is the second hit. . When the second hit determination means determines that the second hit has occurred, before the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, a notification mode indicating the second hit is notified to the player by the notification means. You. Thus, by setting the specific period, the player can determine whether or not the second hit has occurred earlier than usual. Therefore, the specific period can be set as a period more advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to play a game by expecting the player to be set in the specific period, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine C1, the notifying means is for displaying a symbol indicating the second hit on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the symbol indicating the second hit is displayed on the display means by the notifying means, so that the second hit can be more easily understood by the player. There is an effect that recognition can be performed.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the identification symbol is at least set to a common hit identification symbol indicating the first hit or the second hit and a dedicated hit identification symbol indicating the second hit. In the case where the stop is displayed with the common hit identification symbol, a determination notification mode indicating the hit type determined by the hit type determining means is notified during the bonus game executed thereafter. A gaming machine C3, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the identification symbol, at least a common hit identification symbol indicating a first hit or a second hit and a dedicated hit identification symbol indicating a second hit are set. When the stop is displayed in the common hit identification symbol, a determination notification mode indicating the hit type determined by the hit type determination means is notified during the bonus game executed thereafter. Thereby, even during the bonus game, the player can play the game while expecting the second hit. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

<Feature D group>
Main control means for performing control of the game, slave control means for performing control of the game based on a control signal from the main control means, and display means, the main control means, Based on the establishment, a dynamic display time for determining a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying, on the display, an identification symbol indicating a validity determination result by the validity determination unit that performs the validity determination based on the establishment. Dynamic display time determining means for determining, and dynamic display information generating means for generating a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means; A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the stop display with the identification symbol indicating that the hit determination result by the hit determination unit is a hit, The slave control means Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol based on the dynamic display information signal, and display control means for displaying the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining module In the gaming machine having the following, the slave control means comprises: an operating means operable by a player; an operation determining means for determining whether the operating means has been operated; and the identification symbol dynamically displayed by the operation determining means. Switching means for switching the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol to another dynamic display mode based on the determination that the operation means has been operated, and The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is prohibited from being switched to another dynamic display mode by the switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode by the switching unit. Switching prohibition The dynamic display information signal includes a dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means as a first time and a second time added to the first time. The dynamic display mode determination means is configured to include a first dynamic display mode determined based on the first time and a second dynamic display mode determined based on the second time. A gaming machine D1 wherein the switchable period is set within a period in which the first dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the control of the game is executed by the main control means. The control of the game is executed by the slave control means based on the control signal from the main control means. In the main control means, the hit / fail judgment is executed by the hit / fail judgment means based on the establishment of the starting condition. The dynamic display time determining means determines the dynamic display time for determining the dynamic display mode in which the identification symbol indicating the result of the determination by the determination means is dynamically displayed on the display means. A dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means is generated by the dynamic display information generating means. The bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the stop display with the identification symbol indicating that the hit determination result by the hit determination means is a hit. In the slave control means, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol based on the dynamic display information signal. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit is displayed by the display control unit. The operation determining means determines whether the operating means operable by the player has been operated. When the identification symbol is dynamically displayed by the operation determination unit, the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol is switched to another dynamic display mode by the switching unit based on the determination that the operation unit has been operated. . A switchable period that is set by the switching means so as to be switchable to another dynamic display mode and a switching prohibition period in which switching to another dynamic display mode is prohibited are determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit. Are respectively set in the target display mode. The dynamic display information signal is a signal indicating the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means by dividing it into a first time and a second time added to the first time. Is configured. The dynamic display mode determining means determines a first dynamic display mode determined based on the first time and a second dynamic display mode determined based on the second time, respectively. . The switchable period is set within a period in which the first dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. Therefore, since the first dynamic display mode set within the switchable period is configured to be set separately, there is an effect that the control load for setting the first dynamic display mode to be switched can be reduced. .

  In the gaming machine D1, the switching unit switches between a plurality of preset setting modes based on the operation determining unit determining that the operating unit has been operated, and corresponds to the switched setting mode. The dynamic display mode is switched to the setting mode switched by the switching unit as a first dynamic display mode based on the first time. A corresponding dynamic display mode is determined, and the second dynamic display mode is determined based on the set mode and the second time based on the end of the switchable period. A gaming machine D2, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine D2, a plurality of preset setting modes are switched based on the determination that the operating means has been operated by the operation determining means, and a dynamic display mode corresponding to the switched setting mode Is performed by the switching means. The dynamic display mode determining unit determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the setting mode switched by the switching unit as the first dynamic display mode based on the first time, and determines that the switchable period has ended. Based on the setting mode and the second time, the second dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load for setting the second dynamic display mode at the start of the fluctuation can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the switching means sequentially switches the setting mode in a predetermined order based on the operation of the operating means by the operation determining means. Machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the setting mode is sequentially switched in a predetermined order by the switching unit based on the operation of the operating unit by the operation determining unit. By operating the player, it is possible to easily understand which setting mode is to be switched next.

<Feature E group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, a right / wrong determination unit that performs a right / wrong determination, a performance execution unit that performs a performance based on the result of the determination by the right / wrong determination unit, and a plurality of performances performed by the performance execution unit. In a gaming machine having an effect determination means determined from an effect, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on a win / fail decision result by the success / fail determination unit, While the effect is being executed by the effect executing means, a plurality of notice effect executing means for executing a notice effect based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means, and a plurality of notice effects to be executed by the notice effect executing means. Notice effect determining means determined from the notice effect, first operating means operable by the player, second operating means different from the first operating means, and the first operating means And an operation determining means for determining that the second operating means has been operated. The plurality of notice effects are based on an operation by the first operating means and the second operating means, An operation notice effect in which the content of the notice effect changes is included, and the operation notice effect includes at least a first period in which the operation by the first operating means is possible, and during the first period, A gaming machine E1 comprising invalidation means for invalidating an operation by the second operation means.

  According to the gaming machine E1, based on the satisfaction of the starting condition, the determination as to whether or not the game is performed is performed by the game determination unit. An effect based on the result of the determination by the determination unit is executed by the effect execution unit. The effect performed by the effect executing means is determined by the effect determining means from a plurality of effects. Based on the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means being a hit, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. While the effect is being executed by the effect executing means, a notice effect is executed by the notice effect executing means based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means. The notice effect performed by the notice effect executing means is determined by the notice effect determining means from the plurality of notice effects. The operation determining means determines that the first operating means operable by the player and the second operating means different from the first operating means have been operated. An operation announcement effect in which the content of the announcement effect changes based on the operation of the first operation means and the second operation means is included in the plurality of announcement effects. In the operation announcement effect, at least a first period during which the operation by the first operation means is possible is set, and during the first period, the operation by the second operation means is invalidated by the invalidation means. Thus, by setting the operation to invalid, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the correct operation was not performed. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine E1, the first operating means has a pressing portion that can be pressed by a player, and the second operating means can detect that a part of the body of the player has contacted or approached. A detecting section, wherein the player presses the pressing section of the first operating means, and the player is arranged at a position where the detecting section can detect the player. Machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, in the first operating means, a pressing portion that can be pressed by the player is provided in the first operating portion. In addition, a detection unit that can detect that a part of the body of the player has contacted or approached is provided in the second operation unit. The second operating means is arranged at a position where the player can detect the player by pressing the pressing part of the first operating means by the detecting part. Accordingly, it is possible to detect both the first operation means and the second operation means, and it is possible to cause the player to perform an effect with one hand on condition that an effect in which both are detected is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine which can be easily played by a player can be provided.

  In the gaming machine E2, in the operation announcement effect, the content of the announcement effect changes based on that the operation determination unit determines that the detection unit of the second operation means has detected for a predetermined time or more. A gaming machine E3 including a notice effect.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E2, the content of the notice effect changes based on the fact that the detection unit of the second operation means has detected that the detection has been performed for a predetermined time or more by the operation determining means. Since the specific notice effect is included in the operation notice effect, a novel effect can be provided to the player, and there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, in the operation announcement effect, a teaching announcement effect in which a teaching effect teaching the operation timing of the first operation means is executed, and the operation timing of the first operation means is not taught. A gaming machine E4 characterized by including at least a non-teaching notice effect.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a teaching announcement effect in which a teaching effect for teaching the operation timing of the first operation means is executed, and the operation timing of the first operation means are changed. Since the non-teaching notice effect that is not taught is included in at least the operation notice effect, the more the game is played, the easier it is to be able to display the non-teaching notice effect, so that the player can play the game more. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic F group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, a right / wrong determination unit for performing a right / wrong determination, a performance executing unit for performing a performance indicating a result of the determination by the right / wrong determination unit, and a performance content determination for determining the content of the performance by the performance executing unit A state in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine has means and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the determination is a hit. Even for a predetermined period, having a power supply means capable of supplying power, a clocking means capable of clocking even when power is not supplied, and a clocking data acquisition means for acquiring clocking data from the clocking means, Based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, a timekeeping control means for executing a control process relating to a predetermined game, and the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means An operating period determining unit that determines whether or not an operating period set in a period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed from the obtained data; and when the operating period has been determined to have elapsed by the operating period determining unit. And a prohibition setting means for prohibiting control processing by the timekeeping control means.

  According to the gaming machine F1, based on the establishment of the start condition, the determination of the success or failure is executed by the success / failure determination means. The effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is executed by the effect execution unit. The effect content by the effect executing means is determined by the effect content determining means. Based on the result of the success / failure determination being a hit, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. Even when power is not supplied to the gaming machine, the gaming machine has power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period, and the time is measured by the timing means even when power is not supplied. Clock data is acquired by the clock means by the clock data acquisition means. Based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, control processing relating to a predetermined game is executed by the timekeeping control means. The operating period determining unit determines whether or not an operating period set by a period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed from the acquired data obtained by the clocking data obtaining unit. When the operating period determining unit determines that the operating period has elapsed, the control process by the timekeeping control unit is prohibited by the prohibition setting unit. Thus, the control process can be set to be prohibited by the timekeeping control unit before the period in which the power supply unit of the timekeeping unit cannot supply power has elapsed. Therefore, there is an effect that a problem that erroneous control is executed based on inaccurate timing information due to power shortage can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F1, the time counting means is configured to be able to time the date and time, and the operating period is set at a date and time set in a period equal to or less than the predetermined period from the time when the gaming machine was manufactured. A gaming machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. That is, the date and time are clocked by the clock means. The operating period is set at a date and time set within a predetermined period or less from the time when the gaming machine was manufactured. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a failure due to the lapse of the predetermined period.

<Characteristic G group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, a right / wrong determination unit for performing a right / wrong determination, a performance executing unit for performing a performance indicating a result of the determination by the right / wrong determination unit, and a performance content determination for determining the content of the performance by the performance executing unit A state in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine has means and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the determination is a hit. Even for a predetermined period, having a power supply means capable of supplying power, a clocking means capable of clocking even when power is not supplied, and a clocking data acquisition means for acquiring clocking data from the clocking means, Based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, a timekeeping control means for executing a control process relating to a predetermined game, and the timekeeping means being supplied from the power supply means. A power supply determining unit for determining information based on the voltage value; and a control unit configured to control the timer control unit when the voltage value output from the power supply unit is determined to be equal to or less than a predetermined set value. And a prohibition means for prohibiting the game machine G1.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the determination as to whether or not the game is performed is performed by the game determination unit based on the establishment of the start condition. The effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is executed by the effect execution unit. The effect content by the effect executing means is determined by the effect content determining means. Based on the result of the success / failure determination being a hit, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. Even when power is not supplied to the gaming machine, the gaming machine has power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period, and the time is measured by the timing means even when power is not supplied. Clock data is acquired by the clock means by the clock data acquisition means. Based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, control processing relating to a predetermined game is executed by the timekeeping control means. Information based on the voltage value supplied from the power supply means to the timing means is determined by the power supply determination means. When the power supply determining means determines that the voltage value output from the power supply means is equal to or less than a predetermined set value, the control by the timekeeping control means is prohibited by the prohibiting means. Thus, when the voltage value supplied to the timekeeping means becomes equal to or less than the set value, the control processing is set to be prohibited by the timekeeping control means, so that erroneous control is executed based on incorrect timekeeping information due to insufficient power. There is an effect that defects can be suppressed.

<Characteristic H group>
A ball entry port in which a game ball can enter, and lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information necessary for executing a lottery of a game based on that the game ball has entered the entrance port, and A determination unit that determines whether or not a lottery condition is established based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit; and a dynamic display that dynamically displays identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination unit. Control means, at least until the lottery condition is satisfied, storage means for storing the lottery information, display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored by the storage means, A variable means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball easily enters the entrance and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state, and a first condition is satisfied The variable means may be in the second state. When the first condition and the second condition that are changed to the first condition are satisfied, the variable means is changed from the second condition to the first condition so as to be more advantageous to the player than the first condition. A variable control means for changing at least to a second opening which is changed to a variable value, and a game ball entering the entrance opening while being changed to the second opening by the variable control means; Is dynamically displayed, a start information display control means for causing the display means to display a start display mode indicating the start of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the lottery information necessary for executing the lottery of the game is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game ball can enter. . Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, the success / failure determination is executed by the success / failure determination means when the lottery condition is satisfied. The identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display control unit. At least until the lottery condition is satisfied, the lottery information is stored by the storage unit. An identification symbol capable of identifying the number of pieces of lottery information stored by the storage means is displayed by the display means. The variable means changes the state into a first state in which a game ball easily enters the entrance and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state. When the first condition is satisfied, the first opening that is changed by the changing means from the second state to the first state and when the second condition is satisfied are more advantageous to the player than the first opening. The variable state is changed by the variable control means from the second state to the first state and from the second state to the second release state. In the case where a game ball enters the entrance and the identification information is dynamically displayed while being changed to the second opening by the variable control means, a start display indicating the start of the dynamic display The mode is displayed on the display means by the start information display control means. Thereby, while being changed to the second opening, it is possible to inform the player that the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the entrance is displayed in an easily understandable manner. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in expectation of the player entering the ball at the second opening. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine H1, a game ball is configured to be always enterable, and based on the entry of the game ball, the lottery information has a constant entrance where the lottery information acquisition means is acquired, and the storage means The lottery information acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the entrance and the lottery information acquired based on the fact that the ball has always entered the entrance are individually stored. Yes, the lottery information stored in the storage means, the lottery information acquired based on the ball entry into the entrance, the lottery conditions are satisfied with priority, the start information display control means, A game ball enters the entrance while the second opening is being performed, and the identification information indicating a result of the determination as to whether or not the lottery information has entered the constant entrance is dynamically displayed. The start display mode during the dynamic display. Gaming machine H2, and characterized in that Shimesuru.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H1. In other words, in the storage means, the lottery information obtained based on the ball entering the entrance and the game ball is configured to be always able to enter the ball, the lottery information is obtained based on the ball entry of the game ball The lottery information acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the regular entrance that is acquired by the means is individually stored. In the lottery information stored in the storage unit, the lottery information acquired based on the entrance to the entrance is preferentially established for the lottery condition. In the case where a game ball enters the entrance while the opening is in the second opening, and identification information indicating the result of the determination as to whether or not the lottery information has been constantly entered in the entrance is dynamically displayed, The start display mode is displayed by the start information display control means during the dynamic display. Therefore, since the start display mode is displayed before the identification symbol entered with the second opening is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display of the identification symbol based on the ball entry with the second opening in advance is started. There is an effect that the player can be notified.

<Characteristic I group>
A ball entry port in which a game ball can enter, and lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information necessary for executing a lottery of a game based on that the game ball has entered the entrance port, and A success / failure determination unit that executes a success / failure determination when the lottery condition is established based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit; and a storage unit that stores the lottery information at least until the lottery condition is satisfied. Display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of pieces of lottery information stored by the storage means; a first state in which a game ball easily enters the entrance, and a game ball more than the first state A variable means that can be changed to a second state that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and a first opening that changes the variable means from the second state to the first state when a first condition is satisfied. If the second condition is satisfied, A variable control means for at least changing the variable means to a second opening which is changed from the second state to the first state so as to be advantageous to a technician; and Determining means for determining whether the first condition and the second condition are satisfied; determining information displaying means for dynamically displaying determination information indicating a determination result by the determining means; and displaying time for dynamically displaying the determining information. Display time determining means for determining, wherein the display time determining means establishes the lottery trigger a predetermined number of times based on that the determination information indicating the second condition is displayed on the determination information display means. The game machine I1 is characterized in that a display time longer than usual is determined until the game machine I1.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the lottery information necessary to execute the lottery of the game is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game ball can enter. . Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, the success / failure determination is executed by the success / failure determination means when the lottery condition is satisfied. At least until the lottery condition is satisfied, the lottery information is stored by the storage unit. An identification symbol capable of identifying the number of pieces of lottery information stored by the storage means is displayed by the display means. The variable means changes the state into a first state in which a game ball easily enters the entrance and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state. In the case where the first condition is satisfied, the variable means is changed from the second state to the first state in the first opening and in the case where the second condition is satisfied, it is more advantageous for the player than the first opening. The variable means is changed by at least the variable control means to the second opening which is changed from the second state to the first state. The determination unit determines whether the first condition and the second condition are satisfied based on the establishment of the predetermined lottery opportunity. The judgment information indicating the judgment result by the judgment means is displayed by the judgment information display means. The display time for dynamically displaying the determination information is determined by the display time determining means. Based on the fact that the determination information indicating the second condition is displayed on the determination information display means, a display time longer than usual is determined by the display time determination means until the lottery trigger is satisfied a predetermined number of times. Thereby, even if the second condition is continuously satisfied, the display time longer than the normal time is determined after the second release, so that the identification symbol based on the lottery information stored in the storage means during that time. Is dynamically displayed, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that the number of pieces of lottery information stored in the storage means becomes too large.

<Feature J group>
A lottery opening that allows game balls to enter, lottery information acquisition means that acquires lottery information used for lottery of games based on the entry of game balls into the entrance, and the lottery information acquisition Storage means for storing the lottery information obtained by the means at least until a start condition is satisfied, and discrimination symbol display means for individually displaying a discrimination symbol corresponding to each of the lottery information stored in the storage means; Based on the establishment of the starting condition, a right / wrong determination unit for performing a right / wrong determination, a symbol display unit for displaying an identification symbol indicating a determination result of the right / wrong determination by the right / wrong determination unit, and a dynamic display for dynamically displaying the identification symbol. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a display mode, and when the lottery information is stored in the storage means, before the start condition is satisfied, a win / fail determination based on the stored lottery information. Pre-applicability judgment means to be executed, discrimination symbol variable display means for changing the display mode of the discrimination symbol in a display mode in which the judgment result by the pre-appropriation judgment means is identifiable, and In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, a time counting means capable of timing, and a timing data determining means for determining timing data by the timing means. When it is determined by the timing data determination that the dynamic display mode is a predetermined set value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is different from the dynamic display mode in other periods. Effect period setting means for setting at least a specific period to be determined and a preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period; and the discriminating symbol variable means When the discrimination symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a more specific determination as to whether or not the identification symbol corresponding to the discrimination symbol is dynamically displayed within the preparation period, the setting of the preparation period is prohibited. And a prohibition means.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the lottery information used for the lottery of the game is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game ball can enter. The lottery information obtained by the lottery information obtaining means is stored by the storage means at least until the starting condition is satisfied. The discrimination symbols are individually displayed by the discrimination symbol display means corresponding to the respective lottery information stored in the storage means. Based on the establishment of the start condition, the right / wrong determination is executed by the right / wrong determining means. An identification symbol indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed by the symbol display unit. A dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. When the lottery information is stored in the storage means, before the start condition is satisfied, the pass / fail judgment is determined by the preliminary hit / fail judgment means based on the stored lottery information. The display mode of the discriminating symbol is changed by the discriminating symbol variable display means in a display mode in which the result of the judgment by the prior right / wrong judgment means can be identified. Based on the result of the success / failure determination being a hit, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. Timing data by the timing means capable of timing is determined by the timing data determination means. When it is determined by the timing data determination that the set value is a predetermined value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is changed to a dynamic display mode different from the other periods. A period and a preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period are each set at least by the effect period setting means. The discrimination symbol is displayed by the discrimination symbol variable means in a display mode indicating a specific determination as to whether or not the dynamic symbol display corresponding to the discrimination symbol is completed within the preparation period, and the setting of the preparation period is prohibited. Prohibited by any means. Accordingly, a period in which the preparation period is not set can be set, and the result of the determination as to whether or not the game is to be made can be predicted by the player based on whether the preparation period is set. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the playability, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

<Feature K group>
A lottery opening that allows game balls to enter, lottery information acquisition means that acquires lottery information used for lottery of games based on the entry of game balls into the entrance, and the lottery information acquisition Storage means for storing the lottery information obtained by the means at least until a start condition is satisfied, and discrimination symbol display means for individually displaying a discrimination symbol corresponding to each of the lottery information stored in the storage means; Based on the establishment of the starting condition, a right / wrong determination unit for performing a right / wrong determination, a symbol display unit for displaying an identification symbol indicating a determination result of the right / wrong determination by the right / wrong determination unit, and a dynamic display for dynamically displaying the identification symbol. A dynamic display mode determining unit for determining a display mode; and a suggestion indicating a result of the rejection determination by the rejection determining unit while the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit is displayed. Suggestion display control means for displaying an indication mode on the display means; suggestion display mode determination means for determining a suggestion display mode displayed by the suggestion display control section based on a result of the rejection determination by the rejection determination means; and In the case where the lottery information is stored in the means, prior to the start condition being satisfied, a preliminary right / wrong determination unit that performs a right / wrong determination based on the stored lottery information, and a determination by the preliminary right / wrong determination unit Discrimination symbol variable display means for changing the display mode of the discrimination symbol in a display mode capable of discriminating a result, and a bonus game for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player based on the hit result of the hit / fail judgment. Executing means, a timing device capable of timing, a timing data determining device for determining timing data by the timing device, When it is determined by the data determination that the dynamic display mode is a predetermined setting value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is determined to be different from the other periods. The effect period setting means for setting at least a specific period and a preparation period for prohibiting the display of the suggestion display mode before the specific period, and the suggestion display control means determine whether the specific symbol is correct by the discrimination symbol variable means. The discrimination symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating that it is determined that the dynamic display of the identification symbol corresponding to the discrimination symbol starts the dynamic display within the preparation period and the dynamic display ends within the specific period. In this case, the gaming machine K1 displays the suggestion display mode after shifting to the specific period.

According to the gaming machine K1, the lottery information used for the lottery of the game is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance into which the game ball can enter. The lottery information obtained by the lottery information obtaining means is stored by the storage means at least until the starting condition is satisfied. The discrimination symbols are individually displayed by the discrimination symbol display means corresponding to the respective lottery information stored in the storage means. Based on the establishment of the start condition, the right / wrong determination is executed by the right / wrong determining means. An identification symbol indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed by the symbol display unit. A dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. While the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit is being displayed, the suggestion display mode suggesting the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit by the suggestion display control unit. The suggestion display mode displayed by the suggestion display control unit is determined by the suggestion display mode determination unit based on the result of the determination by the determination unit. In the case where the lottery information is stored in the storage means, before the start condition is satisfied, the pass / fail determination is executed by the pre-failure determination means based on the stored lottery information. The display mode of the discriminating symbol is changed by the discriminating symbol variable display means in a display mode in which the result of the judgment by the prior right / wrong judgment means can be identified. Based on the result of the success / failure determination being a hit, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. Timing data by the timing means capable of timing is determined by the timing data determination means. When it is determined by the timing data determination that the set value is a predetermined value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is changed to a dynamic display mode different from other periods. A period and a preparation period for prohibiting the display of the suggestion display mode before the specific period are set by at least the effect period setting means. The suggestion display control means, the discrimination symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a specific success / failure judgment by the discrimination symbol variable means, and the dynamic display of the identification symbol corresponding to the discrimination symbol starts the dynamic display within the preparation period, When it is determined that the dynamic display is completed within the specific period, the suggestion display mode is displayed by the suggestion display control unit after the transition to the specific period. Accordingly, the suggestion display mode is displayed in the specific period, so that the player can expect the player to be in the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.
The gaming machine K2, wherein in the gaming machine K1, the suggestion display control means displays the suggestion display mode on the display means when the transition to the specific period occurs.

  According to the gaming machine K2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K1. That is, the suggestion display mode is displayed on the display means by the suggestion display control means when the transition to the specific period occurs. Therefore, since the suggestion display mode is displayed at the timing of the transition to the specific period, there is an effect that the suggestion display mode can be displayed at a timing synchronized with another same gaming machine.

  The gaming machine K3, wherein in the gaming machine K1 or K2, the determination symbol of the display mode indicating the specific hit / fail judgment is a display mode indicating that the hit / fail judgment result is a hit.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the determination symbol of the display mode indicating the specific determination as to whether or not the hit is a hit result is a hit. There is an effect that it is possible to recognize that there is something, and to be able to recognize it easily in a specific period.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the suggestion display mode determination unit may include, when the specific period is set, the suggestion display mode indicating that the success / failure determination result by the success / failure determination unit is a hit. A gaming machine K4 for determining a specific suggestion display mode.

  According to the gaming machine K4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3. That is, when the specific period is set, the suggestion display mode determining unit sets the specific suggestion display mode as the suggestion display mode indicating that the result of the determination by the determination unit is a hit. It is determined. Therefore, the value of the specific period can be increased, and the player can be expected to be in the specific period.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, there is provided a sound output unit capable of outputting a sound, and a sound control unit for controlling the sound output from the sound output unit, wherein the sound control unit is In the case where the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, if the period until the specific period is set is a predetermined period or less, at least the privilege until the specific period is set. A gaming machine K5 for controlling the volume of a sound related to a game so as to be outputted at a volume lower than a normal time.

  According to the gaming machine K5, the following effect is achieved in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4. That is, the control of the sound output from the sound output means capable of outputting the sound is executed by the sound control means. If the special game is executed by the special game execution means and the period until the specific period is set is shorter than or equal to the predetermined period, at least the sound related to the special game is set until the specific period is set. The volume is controlled by the voice control means so that the volume is output at a volume lower than normal. Therefore, even in the case of a jackpot before the specific period, it is difficult for the surrounding players to notice that it is a jackpot, and in the case of the specific period, it is easy to make it seem as if it was a jackpot. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player think that the big hit is likely to occur in the specific period.

<Characteristic L group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, a right / wrong determination unit that performs a right / wrong determination, a stage execution unit that performs an effect indicating the result of the right / wrong determination by the right / left determination unit, and a stage effect determination that determines the stage content by the stage execution unit A state in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine has means and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the determination is a hit. Even for a predetermined period, having a power supply means capable of supplying power, a timekeeping means capable of timing even when power is not supplied, and a timekeeping data acquisition means for acquiring timekeeping data from the timekeeping means Based on the timing data acquired by the timing data acquisition means, to execute a control process relating to a predetermined game, and to execute control by the timing control means. Switching means capable of at least switching between a first setting and a second setting for prohibiting control by the timing control means, a switching setting means for performing switching setting by activating the switching means, and controlling an operation of the switching operating means. A game machine L1 comprising: an operation control unit.

  According to the gaming machine L1, based on the establishment of the starting condition, the determination as to whether or not the game is performed is performed by the game determination unit. The effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is executed by the effect execution unit. The effect content by the effect executing means is determined by the effect content determining means. Based on the result of the success / failure determination being a hit, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. Even when power is not supplied to the gaming machine, the gaming machine has power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period, and the time is measured by the timing means even when power is not supplied. Clock data is acquired by the clock means by the clock data acquisition means. Based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, control processing relating to a predetermined game is executed by the timekeeping control means. The switching means switches between a first setting for executing the control by the timing control means and a second setting for inhibiting the control by the timing control means. By operating the switching means, the switching is set by the switching setting means. The operation of the switching operation means is controlled by the operation control means. Thus, since the switching means is operated and switched by the switching setting means, there is an effect that the setting can be automatically switched without manually setting the setting.

<Characteristic M group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, a right / wrong determination unit for performing a right / wrong determination, a performance executing unit for performing a performance indicating a result of the determination by the right / wrong determination unit, and a performance content determination for determining the content of the performance by the performance executing unit A state in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine has means and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the determination is a hit. However, for a predetermined period of time, it has a power supply means capable of supplying electric power, a timekeeping means operable even when power is not supplied, a timekeeping data acquisition means for acquiring timekeeping data from the timekeeping means, and the timekeeping means. Based on the timekeeping data acquired by the data acquisition means, a timekeeping control means for executing a control process relating to a predetermined game, and wherein the timekeeping means is supplied with power to the gaming machine. If not, switching means for switching between a first state in which power is supplied from the power supply means and a second state in which power is supplied from the gaming machine based on power being supplied to the gaming machine. A gaming machine M1 characterized by having

  According to the gaming machine M1, based on the establishment of the starting condition, the determination as to whether or not the game is performed is performed by the game determination unit. The effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is executed by the effect execution unit. The effect content by the effect executing means is determined by the effect content determining means. Based on the result of the success / failure determination being a hit, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. The game machine has power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period even when power is not supplied to the gaming machine, and the time data is obtained by the time data acquisition means from the time means operable even when power is not supplied. Is obtained. Based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, control processing relating to a predetermined game is executed by the timekeeping control means. In the timing unit, when the power is not supplied to the gaming machine, the power is supplied from the gaming machine based on the first state in which the power is supplied from the power supply and the power is supplied to the gaming machine. Switching to the second state by the switching means. This makes it possible to extend the period during which power can be supplied during a period in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine. Therefore, there is an effect that the timekeeping means can be used for a longer time.

<Characteristic N group>
Main control means for performing control of the game, slave control means for performing control of the game based on a control signal from the main control means, and display means, the main control means having a predetermined condition Based on the establishment, a lottery information acquisition unit that acquires lottery information, a storage unit that stores the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit at least until the start condition is satisfied, and a storage unit that stores the start condition. And determining a dynamic display time for determining a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying an identification symbol indicating a result of the determination by the determination unit on the display unit. Dynamic display time determining means, dynamic display information generating means for generating a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, This A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the stop display with the identification symbol indicating that the hit determination result by the determination means is a hit, and the slave control means A dynamic display mode determining unit that determines a dynamic display mode of the identification symbol based on the dynamic display information signal; and a display that displays the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit. And a control means, wherein the slave control means comprises: an operating means operable by a player; an operation determining means for determining whether the operating means has been operated; and the identification symbol by the operation determining means. When is dynamically displayed, based on the determination that the operating means has been operated, switching means for switching the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol to another dynamic display mode, and Slave controller The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is a switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode by the switching means, and switching to another dynamic display mode is prohibited. A switching prohibition period is set, and the dynamic display information signal includes a first time which is a dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and a dynamic display time. And a signal indicating a second time that is the remaining time after the predetermined time has elapsed, and the dynamic display mode determination means stores the dynamic display mode up to the second time in the storage means. A first dynamic display mode determined based on the number of the lottery information, and a determination based on the second time period from when the first dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed to when the second time is reached. And the second dynamic display mode to be performed is determined. A gaming machine N1.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the control of the game is executed by the main control means. The control of the game is executed by the slave control means based on the control signal from the main control means. In the main control means, the lottery information is obtained by the lottery information obtaining means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. The lottery information obtained by the lottery information obtaining means is stored by the storage means at least until the starting condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of the start condition, the right / wrong determination is executed by the right / wrong determining means. The dynamic display time determining means determines the dynamic display time for determining the dynamic display mode in which the identification symbol indicating the result of the determination by the determination means is dynamically displayed on the display means. A dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means is generated by the dynamic display information generating means. The bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the stop display with the identification symbol indicating that the hit determination result by the hit determination means is a hit. In the slave control means, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol based on the dynamic display information signal. The display control means controls the display of the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit. The operation determining means determines whether the operating means operable by the player has been operated. When the identification symbol is dynamically displayed by the operation determination unit, the switching unit switches the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol to another dynamic display mode based on the determination that the operation unit has been operated. . In the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit of the slave control unit, a switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode by the switching unit and switching to another dynamic display mode A switching prohibition period in which the operation is prohibited is set. In the dynamic display information signal, a first time which is a dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and a second time which is a remaining time after a predetermined time has elapsed among the dynamic display times. . The dynamic display mode determining means determines the first dynamic display mode and the first dynamic display mode for determining the dynamic display mode up to the second time based on the number of lottery information stored in the storage means. During the period from the display to the second time, the second dynamic display mode determined based on the second time is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. There is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

  The gaming machine Z1 wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is inserted into a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through a winning opening) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine D3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, an RTC (real-time clock) is provided in a gaming machine, and the same effect is executed at the same timing or the display mode is changed between a plurality of gaming machines based on time data measured by the RTC. Is known.
In such a pachinko machine, the display mode is changed when the RTC reaches a preset time (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-31695).
In this kind of pachinko machine, the effect is simply switched at a predetermined time, and once the player experiences the same effect, freshness is lost. Therefore, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting bored early.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is based on the establishment of a starting condition. And a hit type determining means for determining at least a second hit to which a benefit more advantageous to the player is given than the first hit, and a display means for displaying an identification symbol indicating a result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means, A dynamic display mode determining unit that determines a dynamic display mode of the identification symbol displayed on the display unit; and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the result of the determination as to whether or not the hit is displayed is an identification symbol indicating a hit. A bonus game execution means for executing a game, and a timing means capable of timing, a timing data determination means for determining timing data by the timing means, and If the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is determined to be the determined setting value, a specific period in which a dynamic display mode different from other periods is determined, and the specific period A period setting unit for setting a preparation period for starting a specific period before the period, and when the specific period is set by the period setting unit, the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display unit. A dynamic display determining unit for determining whether or not the dynamic display is performed by the dynamic display determining unit. A second hit judging means for judging whether the second symbol is present, and when the second hit judging means determines that the second hit has occurred, the player is given a second hit before the identification symbol is stopped and displayed. That it is a hit And informing means for informing a to notification manner, and has a.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical concept 1, based on the establishment of the starting condition, the right / wrong determination is executed by the right / wrong determination unit. When it is determined that the hit is a hit, the first hit and the second hit to which a benefit more advantageous to the player than the first hit is given are determined at least by the hit type determining means. An identification symbol indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed by the display unit. The dynamic display mode of the identification symbol displayed on the display unit is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit. When the result of the determination is displayed in an identification symbol indicating a hit, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means.
Timing data by the timing means capable of timing is determined by the timing data determination means. When it is determined by the timing data determination that the set value is a predetermined value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is changed to a dynamic display mode different from the other periods. A period and a preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period are set by the period setting means. When the specific period is set by the period setting unit, the dynamic display determining unit determines whether the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display unit.
Based on the determination that the dynamic display is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display determination unit, the second hit determination unit determines whether the result of the dynamic display correctness determination is the second hit. . When the second hit determination means determines that the second hit has occurred, the notification means indicating the second hit is notified to the player before the identification symbol is stopped and displayed. You.
With this, by setting the specific period, the player can determine whether or not the second hit has occurred earlier than usual. Therefore, the specific period can be made a period more advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the player will be set to the specific period, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 operation means (frame button)
64a first starting port (ball entrance)
64b 2nd starting port (ball entrance)
81 third symbol display device ( symbol display means)
113 sound lamp control device (discriminating symbol variable display means)
203a Special design 1 holding ball storage area (part of storage means)
203b Special design 2 holding ball storage area (part of storage means)
292 RTC (measuring means)
S301 Lottery information acquisition means S305 Win / fail determination means S307, S309 Dynamic display period determination means S414 Advance success / failure determination means S1004 Privilege game execution means
S1306 pending number display update processing (discrimination symbol display means)
S1312 Variable display setting processing (symbol display means)
S1422 Dynamic display mode determination means
S1704, S1710, a part of S1713 clocking data discriminating means S1707, S1715 effect period setting means

Claims (1)

An entrance where game balls can enter,
Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information used for the lottery of the game based on that the game ball has entered the entrance,
Storage means for storing the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means at least until the start condition is satisfied,
Discriminating symbol display means for individually displaying discriminating symbols corresponding to the respective lottery information stored in the storage means,
Based on the establishment of the start condition, a determination unit for determining whether to determine whether or not,
Symbol display means for displaying an identification symbol for indicating a result of the determination by the determination unit,
Dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification symbol,
A dynamic display mode determining unit that determines a dynamic display mode of the identification symbol corresponding to the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining unit;
When the lottery information is stored in the storage unit, before the start condition is satisfied, a preliminary hit / fail determination unit that performs a hit / fail determination based on the stored lottery information,
Discrimination symbol variable display means for changing the display mode of the discrimination symbol in a display mode capable of identifying the determination result by the prior right / wrong determination means,
A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the success / failure determination being a hit,
Operating means operable by the player;
A timing means capable of timing;
Timing data discriminating means for discriminating timing data by the timing means;
When it is determined by the timing data determination unit that the predetermined value is a predetermined value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is different from the dynamic display mode in another period. A production period setting means for setting at least a specific period to be determined and a preparation period for starting the specific period,
The preparation period is set as a period longer than the dynamic display period that can be determined by the dynamic display period determination unit,
As the dynamic display mode that can be determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit, a specific dynamic display mode that is set with a high probability of being determined when the result of the determination by the determination unit is a hit is set. Are
Said dynamic display mode decision unit, when the a preparation period state, and are not do not determine the specific dynamic display mode,
Based on the fact that the operating means is operated, the gaming machine according to claim der Rukoto as it can be selected whether the particular time period is set by the presentation period setting means.

Images